Operating Instructions
DVD Recorder
Model No. DMR-EZ49VEB
/
Dear customer
Thank you for purchasing this product.
For optimum performance and safety, please read these instructions carefully.
Before connecting, operating or adjusting this product, please read the instructions completely.
Please keep this manual for future reference.
DVB and the DVB logos are trademarks of the DVB Project.
Notice for DVB functions
This DVD Recorder is for viewing and recording free to view channels only, not Pay TV or encrypted channels
unless connected to an external source capable of receiving Pay TV or encrypted channels.
This unit does not have an analogue broadcast tuner.
About descriptions in these operating instructions
≥Pages to be referred to are indicated as “> ±±”.
Region number supported by this unit
Region numbers are allocated to DVD Recorders and DVD-Video according
to where they are sold.
Example:
≥The region number of this unit is “2”.
≥The unit will play DVDs marked with labels containing “2” or “ALL”.
2
3
2
ALL
5
Model number suffix “EB” denotes UK model.
VQT2J51
EB
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Accessories
Please check and identify the supplied accessories. Use numbers indicated in parentheses when asking for replacement
parts.
(Product numbers correct as of December 2009. These may be subject to change.)
∏ 1 Remote control (N2QAYB000466)
∏ 1 AC mains lead (K2CT2YY00003)
≥For use with this unit only. Do not use it with
other equipment. Also, do not use cords for
other equipment with this unit.
∏ 2 Batteries for remote control
∏ 1 RF coaxial cable (K1TWACC00001)
(R6 Size)
≥Or go on line through our Internet Accessory ordering application at
≥Most major credit and debit cards accepted.
≥All enquiries transactions and distribution facilities are provided
directly by Panasonic UK Ltd.
Sales and Support Information
Customer Care Centre
≥For customers within the UK: 0844 844 3852
≥For customers within the Republic of Ireland: 01 289 8333
≥Visit our website for product information
≥It couldn’t be simpler!
≥Also available through our Internet is direct shopping for a wide
range of finished products, take a browse on our website for further
details.
≥E-mail: [email protected]
Direct Sales at Panasonic UK
≥For customers: 0844 844 3856
Interested in purchasing an extended guarantee?
Please call 0870 240 6284 or visit our website
≥Order accessory and consumable items for your product with ease
and confidence by phoning our Customer Care Centre Monday–
Thursday 9.00 a.m.–5.30 p.m., Friday 9.30 a.m.–5.30 p.m
(Excluding public holidays).
Caution for AC Mains Lead
For your safety, please read the following text carefully.
WARNING: DO NOT CONNECT EITHER WIRE TO THE EARTH
TERMINAL WHICH IS MARKED WITH THE LETTER E, BY THE
EARTH SYMBOL Ó OR COLOURED GREEN OR GREEN/YELLOW.
This appliance is supplied with a moulded three pin mains plug for your
safety and convenience.
A 5-ampere fuse is fitted in this plug.
THIS PLUG IS NOT WATERPROOF—KEEP DRY.
Should the fuse need to be replaced please ensure that the
replacement fuse has a rating of 5-ampere and that it is approved by
ASTA or BSI to BS1362.
Before use
Remove the connector cover.
Check for the ASTA mark Ï or the BSI mark Ì on the body of the fuse.
How to replace the fuse
The location of the fuse differ according to the type of AC mains plug
(figures A and B). Confirm the AC mains plug fitted and follow the
instructions below.
If the plug contains a removable fuse cover you must ensure that it is
refitted when the fuse is replaced.
If you lose the fuse cover the plug must not be used until a replacement
cover is obtained.
A replacement fuse cover can be purchased from your local dealer.
Illustrations may differ from actual AC mains plug.
1.Open the fuse cover with a screwdriver.
CAUTION!
Figure A
Figure B
IF THE FITTED MOULDED PLUG IS UNSUITABLE FOR THE
SOCKET OUTLET IN YOUR HOME THEN THE FUSE SHOULD BE
REMOVED AND THE PLUG CUT OFF AND DISPOSED OF SAFELY.
THERE IS A DANGER OF SEVERE ELECTRICAL SHOCK IF THE
CUT OFF PLUG IS INSERTED INTO ANY 13- AMPERE SOCKET.
Fuse cover
If a new plug is to be fitted please observe the wiring code as stated
below.
If in any doubt please consult a qualified electrician.
IMPORTANT
The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accordance with the
following code:
Blue: Neutral, Brown: Live.
2.Replace the fuse and close or attach the fuse cover.
Figure A Figure B
As these colours may not correspond with the coloured markings
identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows:
The wire which is coloured Blue must be connected to the terminal
which is marked with the letter N or coloured Black or Blue.
The wire which is coloured Brown must be connected to the terminal
which is marked with the letter L or coloured Brown or Red.
Fuse
(5 ampere)
Fuse
(5 ampere)
3
VQT2J51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Precautions
Table of Contents
Getting started
Placement
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Sales and Support Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Caution for AC Mains Lead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Remote Control Information/Unit Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Media Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Disc Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Inserting Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Inserting/Removing the USB memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Inserting a video cassette. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Video Cassette Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Set the unit up on an even surface away from direct sunlight, high
temperatures, high humidity, and excessive vibration. These
conditions can damage the cabinet and other components, thereby
shortening the unit’s service life.
Do not place heavy items on the unit.
Voltage
Do not use high voltage power sources. This can overload the unit
and cause a fire.
Do not use a DC power source. Check the source carefully when
setting the unit up on a ship or other place where DC is used.
AC mains lead protection
Quick Start Guide
Ensure the AC mains lead is connected correctly and not
damaged. Poor connection and lead damage can cause fire or
electric shock. Do not pull, bend, or place heavy items on the lead.
Grasp the plug firmly when unplugging the lead. Pulling the AC
mains lead can cause electric shock.
Do not handle the plug with wet hands. This can cause electric
shock.
Location of Parts/Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
The Unit’s Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Main Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Basic Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Connecting to a Television only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Adding a Digital Satellite Receiver:
Foreign matter
Do not let metal objects fall inside the unit. This can cause electric
shock or malfunction.
Do not let liquids get into the unit. This can cause electric shock or
malfunction. If this occurs, immediately disconnect the unit from the
power supply and contact your dealer.
Do not spray insecticides onto or into the unit. They contain
flammable gases which can ignite if sprayed into the unit.
Connecting to a Television and a Digital Satellite Receiver . . . 11
Connecting AC mains lead (included). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Connecting to a TV with an HDMI (High Definition Multimedia
Interface) Cable (not included) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Setting the Channels and Clock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Disc Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Usable Discs for Recording and Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Play-only Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Discs that Cannot be Played . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Types of disc for the type of connected TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
USB Memory Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Music files and Still Pictures (JPEG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Service
Do not attempt to repair this unit by yourself. If sound is
interrupted, indicators fail to light, smoke appears, or any other
problem that is not covered in these instructions occurs, disconnect
the AC mains lead and contact your dealer or an authorized service
centre. Electric shock or damage to the unit can occur if the unit is
repaired, disassembled or reconstructed by unqualified persons.
Basic Operations
Extend operating life by disconnecting the unit from the power
source if it is not to be used for a long time.
Watching Television . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Watching Digital Satellite Programmes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories.
Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Playing play-only discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Menu Screens on the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Playing a Video Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Recording Television Programmes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Timer Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Copying Titles (One Touch Copy) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Copying Titles (VHS J DVD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Copying Titles or Playlists (DVD J VHS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent #’s: 5,451,942;
5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,487,535 & other U.S. and
worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS and the Symbol are
registered trademarks, & DTS 2.0+ Digital Out and the DTS logos
are trademarks of DTS, Inc. Product includes software.
© DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
Deleting Titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
DELETE Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Deleting Titles During Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
U.S. Patent Nos. 6,836,549; 6,381,747; 7,050,698; 6,516,132;
and 5,583,936.
This product incorporates copyright protection technology that
is protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property
rights. Use of this copyright protection technology must be
authorized by Macrovision, and is intended for home and other
limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by
Macrovision. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
Advanced Features
Notes for Recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Advanced Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
DVD Recording Modes and Durations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
VHS Recording Modes and Durations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
When the format confirmation screen is displayed. . . . . . . . . . 29
When removing a Recorded or Copied Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Specifying the Recording Time
—One Touch Recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Direct TV Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Flexible Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Playing while you are recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Recording from a Digital Satellite Receiver. . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Manual Recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Linked timer recordings with external equipment
(SKY Digital STB/digital satellite receiver) — EXT LINK . . . . 31
Recording from an External Device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Advanced Timer Recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Manual timer recordings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Language for broadcast with multi-audio or multi-subtitle . . . . 33
To cancel a timer recording in progress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
If the “Overlapped Timer Recording” screen appears . . . . . . . 34
Check, Change, Delete Programmes,
HDMI, the HDMI Logo, and High-Definition Multimedia Interface
are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in
the United States and other countries.
HDAVI Control™ is a trademark of Panasonic Corporation.
The FREEVIEW service is subject to coverage.
An aerial upgrade may be required. The FREEVIEW,
FREEVIEW+, FREEVIEW HD and FREEVIEW+ HD words and
logos are trade marks of DTV Services LTD.
DTV Services Ltd 2002, 2008.
or Resolve Overlapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
To deactivate timer programme
(e.g. to interrupt a daily or weekly timer programming) . . . . . 34
Making timer recordings on the television . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Notes on timer recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
4
VQT2J51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GUIDE Plus+ system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Using the GUIDE Plus+ list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
View advertisement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Selecting the programme from the desired programme type
or category. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Searching desired programmes on
Setting Menus
Setting On-Screen Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Accessing the On-Screen Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
DVD Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Accessing the Management Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
GUIDE Plus+ list by words. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
Accessing the Setup Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Advanced Disc Playback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Selecting Titles to Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Skip. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Quick View (Play k 1.3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Direct Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Slow-motion Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Frame-by-Frame Viewing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Time Slip. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Manual Skip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Create Chapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Advanced Video Cassette Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Fast-forward/Rewind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Slow-motion Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Cue/Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Jet Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Jet Rewind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
VHS Index Search System (VISS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
S-VHS Quasi Playback (SQPB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Repeat Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Adjusting the Playback Picture. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Changing Audio during Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
On-screen Display Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Channel Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Playback/Recording and Picture Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Sound and Display Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Connection Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
VHS Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Other Settings
Other Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Child Lock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Using the Unit’s Remote Control to Operate the TV. . . . . . . . . 74
Reference
Additional Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
Adding a VCR: Connecting to a Television and
a Video Cassette Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Connecting to a Television with Audio/Video Cable
(not included) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Adding an Amplifer or Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Connecting with an HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface)
Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Frequently Asked Questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Playing Music files and Still Pictures (JPEG) . . . . . . . . . . 42
Showing the menu screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Playing Music files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Playing still pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Start Slideshow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Discs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
DVB-T. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
GUIDE Plus+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
On the Unit’s Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
On the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Convenient Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
FUNCTION MENU Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Linked Operations with the TV (VIERA Link “HDAVI
ControlTM”/Q Link) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Easy control only with VIERA remote control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Information Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Digital Channel Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Status Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
New Channel Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Troubleshooting Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
When Other Panasonic Products Respond to
this Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
To Reset This Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
General Issues:Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
General Issues:Displays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
General Issues:Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
General Issues:GUIDE Plus+. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
General Issues:DVB-T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
General Issues:VIERA Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
General Issues:USB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Playback Issues:Picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Playback Issues:Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Playback Issues:Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Playback Issues:Music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Playback Issues:Still Pictures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Playback Issues:VHS Picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Playback Issues:VHS Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Playback Issues:VHS Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Recording Issues:Recording/Timer Recording
Entering Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Advanced Editing
Titles—Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Accessing the Title View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Title Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Chapters—Creating, Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Accessing the Chapter View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Chapter Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Creating, Editing and Playing Playlists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Accessing the Playlist View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Creating Playlists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Editing Playlists/Chapters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Still Pictures—Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Accessing the Album (still picture)/Picture View. . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Album (still picture)/Picture Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Deleting still pictures using DELETE Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
/Copying/External input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Recording Issues:VHS Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Editing Issues: DVD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Editing Issues: Still Pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Index. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Backcover
Copying Titles or Playlists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Copying Titles (VHS > DVD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Copying Titles or Playlists (DVD > VHS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Copying a finalised DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW
(DVD-Video format), +R and +R DL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Copying Still Pictures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
5
VQT2J51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Control Information/Unit Care
Remote Control Information
About batteries
≥Insert so the poles (i and j) match those in the remote control.
Using the remote control
Aim at the sensor, avoiding obstacles, up to a maximum range of 7 m
directly in front of the unit.
Remote control signal sensor
R6/LR6, AA
≥Use alkaline or manganese batteries.
≥Do not mix old and new batteries.
≥Do not use different types at the same time.
≥Do not heat or expose to flame.
20
20
30
30
≥Do not leave the battery(ies) in an automobile exposed to direct
sunlight for a long period of time with doors and windows closed.
≥Do not take apart or short circuit.
≥Do not attempt to recharge alkaline or manganese batteries.
≥Do not use batteries if the covering has been peeled off.
The distance and angles are an approximate.
Mishandling of batteries can cause electrolyte leakage which can
damage items the fluid contacts and may cause a fire.
Remove if the remote control is not going to be used for a long period of
time. Store in a cool, dark place.
Unit Care
The precision parts in this unit are readily affected by the
environment, especially temperature, humidity, and dust.
Cigarette smoke also can cause malfunction or breakdown.
Cautions about condensation
Condensation can cause unreliable playback of VHS recordings.
Condensation may form in the following cases,
≥The unit is brought from cold surroundings into a well-heated room.
≥The unit is suddenly brought from cool surroundings, such as an
air-conditioned room or car, to a place which is hot and humid.
≥During rainy seasons.
To clean this unit, wipe with a soft, dry cloth.
≥Never use alcohol, paint thinner or benzine to clean this unit.
≥Before using chemically treated cloth, carefully read the instructions
that came with the cloth.
In any of the above-mentioned conditions, do not operate the unit for at
least 2 hours. The unit is not equipped with a moisture sensor.
Observe the following points to ensure continued listening and
viewing with pleasure.
Dust and dirt may adhere to the unit’s lens over time, making it
impossible to record or play discs.
Use the DVD lens cleaner (not included) about once every year,
depending on frequency of use and the operating environment.
Carefully read the lens cleaner’s instructions before use.
≥
Do not place the unit on amplifiers
or equipment that may become hot.
The heat can damage the unit.
DO NOT
This unit
≥The unit should not be installed or
operated near large magnets or
electromagnetic devices. Such
devices can damage
DVD lens cleaner: RP-CL720E
≥This lens cleaner may not be available for sale in all countries, e.g.
not available in Germany, please consult your Panasonic dealer for
advice.
pre-recorded VHS recordings.
≥Do not place any heavy objects
on top of the unit.
≥The unit should not be mounted in
a vertical position. It’s designed to
operate in the horizontal position.
To clean the video heads
Dirt on the video heads can cause poor recording and play.
If the picture does not improve, use an optional head-cleaning cassette.
For choosing the head-cleaning cassette best suited to this unit, please
consult your Panasonic dealer for advice.
Select a position with good ventilation when installing the unit.
Do not block the cooling fan on the rear of the unit.
If the problem persists, seek advice from a qualified service person.
Before moving the unit, ensure the disc tray and cassette
compartment are empty.
Failure to do so will risk severely damaging the disc, the video
cassette and the unit.
The manufacturer accepts no responsibility and offers no compensation for loss of recorded or edited
material due to a problem with the unit or recordable media, and accepts no responsibility and offers no
compensation for any subsequent damage caused by such loss.
Examples of causes of such losses are
≥
A disc recorded and edited with this unit is played in a DVD Recorder or computer disc drive manufactured by another company.
≥ A disc used as described above and then played again in this unit.
A disc recorded and edited with a DVD Recorder or computer disc drive manufactured by another company is played in this unit.
≥
6
VQT2J51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Media Handling
Disc Care
Inserting/Removing the USB memory
Inserting the USB memory
Holding a disc
Handle discs by the edges to avoid inadvertently scratching or
getting oil from your fingers on the disc. Do not touch the signal
surface of discs (the shiny side).
Cleaning discs
Discs are not indestructible and occasionally dirt or
condensation may appear. Clean by gently wiping with a soft,
dry lint-free cloth in a straight line from the centre of the disc to
the edge of the disc.
Return discs to their cases when not in use; this helps to protect
against scratches and dirt.
≥ Before inserting any USB memory to this unit, ensure that the
data stored therein has been backed up.
≥ Check the orientation of the USB connector and insert it
straight in.
≥ Insert an USB device while the unit is stopped, so the “USB
device” screen is displayed. Select an item, then press [OK]
to switch to the USB-related operations (> 42, 60).
Storing discs
≥ Do not place or store discs in the following locations:
– Direct sunlight
– Very dusty or humid areas
– Near a heat source
– Places that undergo extreme shifts in temperature
(condensation can occur)
– Where static electricity or electromagnetic waves occur
Removing the USB memory
≥ Complete all USB-related operations and pull the USB
memory straight out.
≥ If a USB memory being accessed is pulled out, then the data
may be damaged.
Discs to avoid
≥ Discs that are not perfectly circular in shape
≥ Warped discs, which may not balance properly in your unit,
causing improper operation or damage to the unit
≥ Cracked discs
≥ Discs with exposed adhesive (from removed stickers or
labels, such as may occur with rental discs or improperly
cared-for discs that were previously labelled or re-labelled)
Inserting a video cassette
Insert a video cassette.
(The surface on which you can see a roll of tape should
face up.)
The unit is automatically turned on.
Inserting Discs
1 Press [< OPEN/CLOSE] to open the tray.
– Insert a disc.
Insert label-up.
To eject:
From the main unit
≥ Press [< EJECT] on the main unit.
2 Press [< OPEN/CLOSE] to close tray.
From the remote control
≥ Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select VHS drive and then press
and hold [∫] for about 3 or more seconds.
Notes
≥ Ensure the disc is flat in the tray.
≥ When using DVD-RAM or DVD-R, remove the disc from the
cartridge. Cartridge discs cannot be used.
≥ It is not possible to record or play continuously from one
side of a double sided disc to the other. You will need to
eject the disc and turn it over.
Video Cassette Information
Video cassettes
≥ Break off the video cassette’s tab to
prevent accidental erasure.
Cover the hole with a double layer of
adhesive tape when you want to use the
video cassette for recording again.
≥ You can use video cassettes with the
Automatic drive select function
[DVD-V] [VCD] [CD]
≥ If the unit is stopped, it automatically switches to the DVD
drive when a disc is inserted.
VHS and S-VHS marks, but the unit is
unable to make full use of the
characteristics of S-VHS video
cassettes.
Tab
Video cassette care
≥ Poor quality or damaged video cassettes can cause the
heads to become dirty and malfunction. Store your video
cassettes carefully and discard them when they become dirty
or damaged.
≥ Never use video cassettes on which juice has been spilled or
those that are extremely damaged since this will not only
cause the heads to become dirty, but will also make the unit
malfunction.
7
VQT2J51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Quick
Start
Guide
Location of Parts/Controls
Remote Control
1 Turn the unit on or off .................................................. (> 13)
2 Select drive [DVD or VHS] ............................... (> 20, 21, 22)
3 Select channels and title numbers etc./
Enter numbers.............................................................. (> 13)
4 To delete unwanted recorded titles, timer programmes,
or still pictures/Reset the tape counter ...... (> 26, 34, 41, 56)
5 Basic operations for recording and play
TV
6 Show the digital channel information
VOL
DRIVE
CH
/Programme information within GUIDE Plus+ screen
/Show status messages..............................(> 36, 41, 48, 49)
7 Show DIRECT NAVIGATOR...................................(> 38, 43)
8 Selection/OK, Frame-by-frame............................... (> 13, 39)
SELECT
AV
TRACKING/V-LOCK/PAGE
2 3
4 5 6
1
9 Show OPTION menu
CH
– for accessing Slideshow or Standby Settings, etc.
– for playing or editing titles and still pictures, etc. (> 43, 50)
– for showing advertisements (> 36)
PROG/CHECK
CHAPTER
8 9
0
7
– for searching for programmes (> 37)
– for showing Audio Description screen (> 48)
– for viewing the Top Menu of DVD-Video (> 20)
DELETE
INPUT
SELECT
: Use Colour buttons (Red, Green, Yellow, Blue) according to
RESET
SLOW/SEARCH
on-screen instructions.
– for switching the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen (> 38, 43)
– for switching VIDEO / Playlists (> 58)
– for GUIDE Plus+ operations (> 36)
SKIP/INDEX
REW
FF
STOP
PAUSE
PLAY
– for deactivating timer programme (> 34)
– for selecting programme category (> 33, 37, 49)
– for editing Favourites (> 66)
STATUS
EXIT
; Recording function
[¥ REC]: Start recording ......................................................................(> 22)
[REC MODE]: Change recording mode ................................................(> 22)
[EXT LINK]: Linked timer recordings with external equipment..............(> 31)
[¥ DIRECT TV REC]: Direct TV Recording .........................................(> 29)
OK
< DVB function
[TEXT
]: Show Digital Teletext service.............................................(> 48)
OPTION
RETURN
[STTL
]: Show subtitles................................................................... (> 48)
= Transmission window
MANUAL SKIP
-10s
+60s
> TV operations .............................................................. (> 74)
? Channel select/Change pages in the GUIDE Plus+ list
/TRACKING/V-LOCK.................................. (> 19, 22, 36, 41)
@ Show timer recording list .............................................. (> 33)
A Input select (Tuner, AV1, AV2, AV3) .................(> 19, 31, 32)
B Create chapters............................................................(> 39)
C Exit the menu screen
REC
REC MODE EXT LINK DIRECT TV REC
TEXT
TIME SLIP
JET REW
STTL
DISPLAY
D Show the GUIDE Plus+ screen ........................ (> 19, 23, 36)
E Show FUNCTION MENU ............................................. (> 45)
By using the FUNCTION MENU you may access the main
functions (Playback, Recording, etc.) quickly and easily.
F Return to previous screen
G Skip approx. +60s ....................................................... (> 39)
H Skip approx. -10s ........................................................ (> 39)
I Skip the specified time/
Jet rewind button (JET REW)................................. (> 39, 40)
J Show menu for disc playback etc./
Change DVB multi audio .............................................. (> 62)
8
VQT2J51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Unit’s Display
1 Timer recording indicator.......................... (> 23) 5 Digital broadcast indicator
On:
Lights when the unit is receiving digital broadcast.
When a timer recording programme is registered and a
recordable disc or video cassette is inserted.
Flashes:
When the unit cannot record a timer recording programme
(e.g., there is no disc or video cassette, etc.).
6 Linked timer recordings with external equipment
indicator..................................................... (> 31)
7 Tape indicator
8 Recording/Playback indicator
9 Remote control visual feedback
This flashes when it is operated by the remote control.
: Disc indicator
2 Recording mode indicator......................... (> 28)
3 Main display section
Current time/playback counter, various messages
4 Copying indicator
This indicator lights up when a disc is inserted.
Main Unit
Remote Control
signal sensor (> 6)
Cassette
compartment
Disc Tray
OPEN/CLOSE
EJECT
CH
REC
DVD
DRIVE SELEC
VHS
DVD
VHS
COPYING
AV3 IN
S
VIDEO VIDEO
L
/
M
O
N
O
AUDIO
The unit‘s display
Opening the front panel
Press down on the
VHS
C
O
P
Y
I
N
G
DVD
part with your finger.
1 Cassette eject button
7 AV3 input terminals ................................... (> 32)
2 Disc tray open/close button ...................... (> 20)
3 Start recording button ............................... (> 22)
4 Stop button ......................................... (> 20, 22)
5 Play button................................................ (> 20)
6 Standby/on switch (Í/I)..................... (> 13)
Press to switch the unit from on to standby mode
or vice versa. In standby mode, the unit is still
consuming a small amount of power.
8 DVD/VHS drive indicator........................... (> 20)
≥Lights when the DVD or VHS drive is selected.
≥There is no drive indicator for HDD or SD drive.
9 DRIVE SELECT button ................. (> 20, 21, 22)
≥Drive changes each time you press [DRIVE SELECT].
: Channel Select button........................ (> 19, 22)
; USB port..................................................... (> 7)
< One Touch Copying operation button
≥From VHS to DVD ......................................... (> 24)
≥From DVD to VHS.......................................... (> 25)
Rear Panel
Model No.DMR-EZ49V
NO. VR7AA01002
R
SER
RF
IN
RF
OUT
OPTICAL
AC I N
R-AUDIO-L VIDEO
OUT
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
(PCM/BITSTREAM)
AV2 (EXT)
AV1 (TV)
1 AC IN~ = Power supply ............................ (> 11) 6 AUDIO/VIDEO output terminals ............... (> 76)
Connection for the AC mains lead
2 Serial number
3 Cooling fan
7 AV2 (EXT) 21-pin Scart terminal ......... (> 11, 75)
Connection of an external unit
8 AV1 (TV) 21-pin Scart terminal..... (> 10, 11, 75)
TV set connection
4 HDMI AV OUT terminal....................... (> 12, 77)
9 Aerial output terminal.................... (> 10, 11, 75)
Digital audio and video output terminal
5 Digital audio output terminal ...................... (> 76) : Aerial input terminal...................... (> 10, 11, 75)
9
VQT2J51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Connection
Use of the RF coaxial cable
≥ Keep the RF coaxial cables as far away as possible from other cables.
≥ Do not roll up the RF coaxial cables.
Using a fully wired 21-pin Scart cable
– You can use a variety of Q Link functions by connecting the unit to a Q Link compatible television (> 46).
– You can enjoy high-quality viewing by connecting the unit to an RGB compatible television.
“AV1 Output” in the Setup menu is set to “RGB 1” or “RGB 2” (> 71)
Make “AV2 Input” settings in the Setup menu (> 71)
≥ Before connection, turn off the mains for all connected equipment and read the appropriate operating
instructions.
BE SURE TO READ THE CAUTION FOR AC MAINS LEAD ON PAGE 3.
Connecting to a Television only
This unit
HDMI
AV OUT
RF IN
1
RF OUT
(TV)
AV1
To the aerial
The RF coaxial cable
cannot be used for
showing pictures from
the unit. The unit must
be connected using
another method, e.g.
21-pin Scart cable
to show pictures
2
3
HDMI cable
You can enjoy high-quality picture by
adding the HDMI cable connection > 12
from the unit on the
HDMI IN
AV
RF IN
television set.
TV
1 Aerial cable to the “RF IN” on the unit.
2 RF coaxial cable (included) from the “RF OUT” on the unit to the “RF IN” on the TV.
3 21-pin Scart cable from the “AV1 (TV)” on the unit to the “AV” on the TV.
21-pin Scart terminal
1
3
5
7
9 11 13 15 17 19
21
2
4
6
8 10 12 14 16 18 20
10
VQT2J51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adding a Digital Satellite Receiver: Connecting to a Television and a Digital Satellite
Receiver
Digital satellite antenna
To the aerial
Digital satellite receiver
1
DISH
RF IN
HDMI OUT
INPUT
AV/TV
AV/VCR
RF OUT
This unit
2
3
4
HDMI
RF IN
AV OUT
RF OUT
AV2 (EXT) AV1(TV)
6
TV
The RF coaxial cable cannot be
used for showing pictures from the
unit. The unit must be connected
using another method, e.g. 21-pin
Scart cable to show pictures from
the unit on the television set.
5
HDMI IN
HDMI IN
AV
AV
RF IN/
AERIAL
HDMI cable
You can enjoy high-quality picture by adding
the HDMI cable connection > 12
1 Aerial cable to the “RF IN” on the digital satellite receiver.
2 RF coaxial cable from the “RF OUT” on the digital satellite receiver to the “RF IN” on the unit.
3 RF coaxial cable (included) from the “RF OUT” on the unit to the “RF IN” on the TV.
4 21-pin Scart cable from the “AV/VCR” on the digital satellite receiver to the “AV2 (EXT)” on the unit.
5 21-pin Scart cable from the “AV1 (TV)” on the unit to the “AV” on the TV.
6 21-pin Scart cable from the “AV/TV” on the digital satellite receiver to the “AV” on the TV.
To view digital satellite programmes
Refer to “Watching Digital Satellite Programmes” (> 19)
To record digital satellite programmes
Refer to “Recording from a Digital Satellite Receiver” (> 31)
Connecting AC mains lead (included)
Connect only after all other connections are complete.
This unit
To household mains
socket
AC IN
When the unit is not to be used for a long time
To save power, unplug it from the household mains socket. This unit consumes a small amount of power, even
when it is turned off.
[Approx. 0.5 W (“Power Save in Standby” is activated and “RF OUT ( Aerial Signal )” is set to “Off”.)]
After completing the above connections, proceed to the TV Tuning (> 13).
Additional Connections
112, 75
11
VQT2J51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Connection
≥ You can enjoy high-quality picture by adding the HDMI cable connection to the 21-pin Scart cable connection
between this unit and your TV.
Connecting to a TV with an HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) Cable (not
included)
When connected to an HDMI compatible unit, an uncompressed digital audio and video signal is transmitted, enabling
you to enjoy high quality, digital video and audio with just one cable. When connecting to an HDMI-compatible HDTV
(High Definition Television), the output can be switched to 1080p, 1080i or 720p HD video.
≥ This unit incorporates HDMITM (V.1.3a with Deep Colour) technology that can reproduce greater colour
gradation (4096 steps) when connected to a compatible TV.
A lower colour gradation (256 steps), without Deep Colour, will be reproduced if connected to a TV which does not
support Deep Colour.
The unit will automatically set appropriate output to suit the connected TV.
≥ Video sources converted to 1920t1080 resolution, while of high quality, will exhibit somewhat lower subjective
image resolution than true, native 1080p full-HD sources. See dealer for details.
≥ Please use High Speed HDMI Cables that have the HDMI logo (as shown on the cover).
≥ When setting video output to “1080p”, please use the HDMI cables 5.0 meters or less.
Regarding VIERA Link “HDAVI ControlTM” function
When connecting with a Panasonic TV (VIERA) or a receiver equipped with the “HDAVI Control” function, linked
operations would be possible. [> 46, Linked Operations with the TV (VIERA Link “HDAVI ControlTM”/Q Link)]
≥ It is recommended that you use Panasonic’s HDMI cable.
Recommended part number: RP-CDHS15 (1.5 m), RP-CDHS30 (3.0 m), RP-CDHS50 (5.0 m), etc.
≥ Non-HDMI-compliant cables cannot be utilised.
Digital Satellite receiver
TV
HDMI IN
HDMI IN
HDMI OUT
Connecting with a Panasonic TV
(VIERA)
If the 21-pin Scart cable is connected,
the following functions are available.
AV/VCR
AV
≥ Direct TV Recording (> 29)
≥ Watching Digital Satellite
Programmes (> 19)
(In this case, make sure to switch
the television input to “AV”.)
HDMI
AV OUT
AV1(TV)
AV2 (EXT)
HDMI cable
This unit
21-pin Scart cable
≥Set “Digital Audio Output” to “HDMI and Optical” (> 70).
(The default setting is “HDMI and Optical”.)
To enjoy High Quality Video up-converted to 1080p, you need to connect the unit to 1080p compatible HDTV and set “HDMI Video
Format” in the Setup menu to “1080p” (> 70).
Notes
≥If connecting to equipment that is only compatible with 2 channel audio output, audio with 3 channels or more will be down-mixed
(> 92) and output as 2 channels, even if connecting with an HDMI cable (some discs cannot be down-mixed).
≥You cannot connect this unit to DVI devices that are incompatible with HDCP.
For display units compatible with HDCP (High-Bandwidth Digital Content Protection) that are equipped with a digital DVI input
terminal (PC monitors, etc.):
Depending on the unit, picture may not be displayed properly or at all when connecting with a DVI/HDMI switching cable (audio
cannot be output).
12
VQT2J51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting the Channels and Clock
Preparation:
≥ Turn on the mains for the television
(and connected equipment) and
select the appropriate AV input to suit
the connections to this unit.
TV
VOL
CH
DRIVE
≥ These are the first settings you make
SELECT
AV
upon buying the unit. You don’t need
to make these settings again.
control
TV’s remote
TRACKING/V-LOCK/PAGE
2 3
4 5 6
1
CH
DVB Auto Setup
1
2
Scan
CH
27
CH 21
Channel Name
BBC ONE Wales
BBC 2W
68
Type Quality
to turn the unit on.
9
9
TV
TV
PROG/CHECK
CHAPTER
27
8 9
7
27
27
BBC NEWS 24
TV
9
9
DVB Auto Setup starts. The unit
will search for the digital terrestrial
channels. This takes about
5 minutes.
BBC Radio Wales
Radio
DELETE
INPUT
TV: 6
Radio: 4
Data: 0
0
SELECT
Searching...
RESET
SLOW/SEARCH
RETURN
Power Save in Standby
Power Save in Standby
Function:
3, 4 to select “On”,
“On Timer” or “Off”, then
SKIP/INDEX
REW
FF
Power Save
On
STOP
PAUSE
PLAY
From
To
6
0
:00
:00
STATUS
EXIT
Saves standby power consumption
by disabling Quick Start function and
AV2 loop-through in standby.
CHANGE
OK
RETURN
OK
“On”:
It will go into the Power Save in Standby mode
when the unit is in standby mode.
OK
“On Timer”: Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to set the start and stop time,
then press [OK].
It is possible to start quickly from the standby
mode. (Quick Start mode)
OPTION
RETURN
“Off”:
MANUAL SKIP
≥“Power Save in Standby” is set to activate during
the setting time period.
-10s
+60s
– The features of the Power Save in Standby function when
the unit is in standby mode are as below.
REC
REC MODE EXT LINK DIRECT TV REC
Activated (On
/ On Timer)
Approx. 0.5W*2
Deactivated
Deactivated
(Off)
TEXT
TIME SLIP
JET REW
STTL
DISPLAY
Power Save in Standby
Power consumption
Quick Start*1
Approx. 14W
Activated
Turns off
(The clock display
disappears.)
Tips
Front display
Stays lit
Can do
To cancel Auto-Setup
Press [RETURN ].
Watching the picture from the
digital satellite receiver
Cannot do
If the unit displays “No stations
found!”
connected to the AV2 terminal
§1
Press [1] to select “No” and press [OK].
Go to step 2. After you have performed
steps 2–;, turn off the unit and confirm
the cable or aerial input is connected to
the RF IN terminal. Restart the Auto-
Setup again (> 67, DVB Auto Setup by
Signal Quality).
The unit could take over 1 minute to switch ON from standby mode with
Quick start deactivated.
This time could be reduced to less than 10 seconds with Quick start
activated.
§2
When “RF OUT ( Aerial Signal )” is set to “Off” in the Setup menu (> 72)
When setup has completed, the confirmation screen appears.
3
If the clock setting menu appears or
the clock is not correct
OK
Set the clock manually (> 14).
(continued on the next page)
Restarting the Auto-Setup (> 67, DVB
Auto Setup by Signal Quality)
To set the channel list best suited to
your region (> 67, DVB Auto Setup by
Region)
About the screen saver function
When this unit is not operated for
approximately 5 minutes while the screen
is being displayed, the screen saver may
be displayed.
You can turn this function off (> 69,
Screen Saver).
13
VQT2J51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting the Channels and Clock
The Owner ID settings screen appears.
Clock Setting
This unit usually obtains time and date information from
digital broadcasts and automatically corrects the time
several times a day.
However, if the clock is not set correctly, you can set it
manually as follows.
4
1 and press the numbered
buttons to enter your choice of a 4-
digit PIN number.
Owner ID
Make a note of the
PIN number (don’t
With the unit stopped
ꢀꢀꢀꢀ
PIN number
1
forget). Owner ID
cannot be reset by
“Shipping Condition”
in the Setup menu
(> 73)
Name
House No.
Postcode
RETURN
RETURN
:
leave
5
6
OK
to store the PIN number.
2
OK
3, 4 to select “Others”, then
OK
2 to select “Yes”, then
The cursor moves to “Name”.
3
OK
3, 4 to select “Setup”, then
1 to enter the name.
7
8
3, 4 to select “Others”, then 1
4
3, 4 to select a letter, then 1 to
5
OK
3, 4 to select “Clock”, then
move to next character.
Repeat this to enter the name.
3, 4 to select Automatic “Off”,
6
OK
then
9
:
OK
to store the name.
Clock
Automatic
Off
4 and 1 and then repeat steps
8, 9 to enter and store “House
No.” and “Postcode”.
Time
0
Date
:
00
:
00
1
/
1
/
2010
Number
Please set clock manually.
OK: store RETURN: leave
CHANGE
OK
SELECT
RETURN
RETURN
;
2, 1 to select the item you want
7
to change.
The items change as follows:
The Owner ID settings screen disappears.
Hour!#Minute!#Second!#Day!#Month!#Year
^-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------J
– Auto-Setup for your unit is complete. You can
now choose your favourite channels and store
them in the required order in the Favourites.
(> 66)
3, 4 to change the setting.
8
9
You can also use the numbered buttons for
setting.
Tips
OK
to confirm new date and time
To correct the PIN number
1
2
Press [2, 1] to select the digit.
Press the numbered buttons to enter the digit.
and to initiate the clock.
To correct the character
RETURN
:
1
2
Press [2, 1] to select the character.
Press [3, 4] to correct the character.
To display the Owner ID information on TV
Press and hold [∫] on the main unit for more than 5 seconds.
The PIN number is not displayed.
Tips
≥If the clock is set manually, the clock does not automatically correct
the time. We recommend you set “Automatic” in the Clock setting
menu to “On” in step 6 (> above).
After 30 seconds this menu automatically disappears.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
14
VQT2J51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Disc Handling
Usable Discs for Recording and Playback
Data that can
be recorded
and played
Copy-once
recording
(CPRM) (> 27)
Play on other Recording 16:9
Disc type
Logo
Rewritable
Standard symbol
players§1
aspect picture§2
≤
Video
Still picture
CPRM (> 92)
compatible
discs only.
[RAM]
DVD-RAM
≤
≤
≤
[-R] before finalisation
[DVD-V] after finalisation
DVD-R
Video
Video
–
–
≤
≤
≤
≤
–
–
[-R]DL] before finalisation
[DVD-V] after finalisation
DVD-R DL
[-RW‹V›] before finalisation
[DVD-V] after finalisation
DVD-RW
+R
Video
Video
≤
≤
≤
≤
–
–
[+R] before finalisation
[DVD-V] after finalisation
–
– (4:3 aspect)
[+R]DL] before finalisation
[DVD-V] after finalisation
+R DL
+RW
Video
Video
–
≤
≤
– (4:3 aspect)
– (4:3 aspect)
–
–
≤
[+RW]
≤: Can do, –: Cannot do
≥The explanations concerning video cassettes are indicated by [VHS].
§1
≥Formatting and/or recording/initializing constraints may prevent
you from playing or recording certain discs.
≥Please see specifications (> 91) for compatible disc versions and
recording speeds.
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
Finalisation is needed for playback on other equipment (> 65).
[RAM] can be played back on Panasonic DVD recorders and
DVD-RAM compatible DVD players.
[-R]DL], [+R]DL] or [+RW] can be played back only on equipment
compatible with these discs.
For further information (> 27, Notes for Recording)
Notes
§2
≥[RAM] will show an increase in available space whenever a title has
been erased.
≥[-RW‹V›] and [+RW] discs will only show an increase in available
space when their last title has been erased.
≥[-R] [-R]DL] [+R] [+R]DL] The discs will show no increase in available
space after deleting titles.
≥You may not be able to record depending on the condition of the
discs and you may not be able to play them due to the condition of
the recording.
≥[RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] To use a new disc, formatting is
necessary (> 64).
≥[+RW] If the disc failed to play on other equipment, we recommend
you create top menu (> 65).
≥Use of Panasonic discs is recommended.
For available recording times for different discs under different
recording modes, see “DVD Recording Modes and Durations”
(> 28).
When playing DVD-R DL (Dual Layer, single-sided) and +R DL (Double Layer, single-sided)
DVD-R DL (Dual Layer, single-sided) and +R DL (Double
DVD-R DL
When switching layers:
Layer, single-sided) discs have two writable layers on one
side. When playing a title recorded on both layers, the unit
automatically switches between layers and plays the title in
the same way as a normal programme.
+R DL
Video and audio may momentarily cut
Second recordable layer
However, video and audio may momentarily cut out when the
unit is switching layers.
The available space
First recordable layer
Title 1
Title 2
Playback direction
(Inner section of the disc)
(Outer section of the disc)
∫Recording Modes and Durations (> 28)
15
VQT2J51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Disc Handling
Play-only Discs
Disc type
Logo
Standard symbol
Uses
DVD-Video
[DVD-V]
High quality movie and music discs
DVD-RW§ video recorded on another DVD recorder
≥You can play programmes that allow One time only recording if they
have been recorded onto a CPRM compatible disc.
≥By formatting (> 64) the disc, you can record onto it in DVD-Video
format.
DVD-RW (DVD
Video
Recording
format)
[-RW‹VR›]
≥It may be necessary to finalise the disc on the equipment used for
recording.
DVD-R
MP3, JPEG
≥DVD-R§ and DVD-R DL§ with music recorded in MP3 (> 18)
≥DVD-R§ and DVD-R DL§ with still pictures recorded in JPEG (> 18)
DVD-R DL
[CD]
≥Recorded audio and music (including CD-R/RW§)
CD
≥CD-R§ and CD-RW§ with music recorded in MP3 (> 18)
MP3, JPEG
≥CD-R§ and CD-RW§ with still pictures recorded in JPEG (> 18)
Video CD
[VCD]
≥Recorded music and video (including CD-R/RW§)
SVCD
§
Play may be impossible on some DVD-RW (DVD Video Recording format), DVD-R, DVD-R DL, CD-R or CD-RW discs due to the condition of the
recording.
≥You can play still pictures (JPEG) and MP3 format data recorded on DVD-R, DVD-R DL or CD-R/RW. You can also play CD-DA, Video CD and
SVCD (conforming to IEC62107) format data recorded on CD-R/RW. Close the session or finalise the disc after recording.
≥The producer of the disc can control how discs are played. So you may not always be able to control play as described in these operating
instructions. Read the disc’s instructions carefully.
Discs that Cannot be Played
Types of disc for the type of connected TV
When you use the discs recorded either PAL or NTSC, refer to this
≥ 2.6/5.2 GB DVD-RAM, 12 cm
table.
≥ 3.95/4.7 GB DVD-R for Authoring
≥ DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW, +R, +R DL recorded on
another unit and not finalised (> 92).
≥ Discs recorded with AVCHD format
≥ DVD-Video with a region number other than “2” or
“ALL”
(≤: Possible to view, –: Impossible to view)
TV type
Disc
PAL
Yes/No
≤
Multi-system TV
≥ DVD-Audio
≥ Blu-ray, HD DVD
≥ DVD-ROM, +R 8 cm, CD-ROM, CDV, CD-G, Photo CD,
CVD, SACD, MV-Disc, PD, DivX Video Disc
≥ DVD-RAM with a cartridge (TYPE 1)
NTSC
PAL
≤
≤
PAL TV
NTSC
PAL
≤
§1 (PAL60)
–
NTSC TV
§2
NTSC
≤
§1
If your television is not equipped to handle PAL 525/60 signals the
picture will not be shown correctly.
Select “NTSC” in “TV System” (> 70).
§2
≥When playing back a disc, ensure that you match the “TV System”
setting to the disc (PAL or NTSC) (> 70).
16
VQT2J51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
USB Memory Handling
USB memories you can use on this unit
USB memories which are defined as USB mass storage class, and digital cameras that use PTP protocol:
– USB memories that support USB 1.0/1.1 and USB 2.0 Full Speed/High Speed.
≥USB memories of up to 128 GB can be used.
Compatible USB
memories
≥USB memories that support bulk only transfer.
CBI (Control/Bulk/Interrupt) is not supported.
≥Digital Cameras which require additional programme installation when connected to a PC are not supported.
≥MTP (Media Transport Protocol) device is not supported.
≥A multi-port USB card reader is not supported.
FAT16 and FAT32 file systems are supported.
≥UDF/NTFS/exFAT file system is not supported.
≥Depending on the sector size, some files may not work.
≥Only the first partition on USB memories with multi-partition is supported.
Format
Standard symbol
[USB]
Data that can be played or copied (> 18)
(≤: Possible, –: Impossible)
Still pictures (JPEG)
File format
Playing
MP3
≤
≤
You can play MP3 files recorded with a computer onto the You can play still pictures recorded with a computer onto
USB memory (> 42). the USB memory and copy them to DVD-RAM (> 43, 60).
Instructions
≥Despite meeting the conditions mentioned above, there may be USB memories that cannot be used for this unit.
≥This unit’s USB port does not support bus-powered USB device.
17
VQT2J51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Music files and Still Pictures (JPEG)
Notes
[RAM]
MP3 File Information
≥Compatible formats: DCF§compliant (Content recorded on a digital
Playable media
File format
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]
camera, etc.)
§
Design rule for Camera File system: unified standard established
MP3
by Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries
Association (JEITA)
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD]
≥Compatible formats: ISO9660 level 1 or 2 (except for extended
formats) and Joliet
≥This unit is compatible with multi-session/border (except for DVD-R
DL); however, reading or play of the disc may take time if there are a
lot of sessions.
≥Files must have the extension “.mp3” or “.MP3”.
Number of folders Maximum number of folders (groups or albums)
(groups or albums) recognizable:
300 folders (groups or albums) (including the root
folder)
Maximum number of files (tracks) recognizable§1
3000 files (tracks)
:
Number of files
(tracks)
≥Operation may take time to complete when there are many files
(tracks) and/or folders (groups or albums); some files (tracks) may not
display or be playable.
Bit rates
32 kbps to 320 kbps
Sampling
frequency
16 kHz/22.05 kHz/24 kHz/32 kHz/44.1 kHz/48 kHz
≥
Images recorded at a very high resolution may take a long time to display.
≥English alphabetical characters and Arabic numerals are displayed
correctly. Other characters may not display correctly.
≥The display order on this unit may differ from how the order is
displayed on a computer.
ID3 tags
compatible ([USB])
Still Picture (JPEG§2) Information
≥
Depending on how you create the disc (writing software), files (tracks) and
folders (groups or albums) may not play in the order you number them.
Playable media
File format
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]
≥This unit is not compatible with packet-write format.
≥Depending on the recording conditions, the disc may not be played.
JPEG
≥Files must have the extension “.jpg” or “.JPG”.
Tips
Compatible pixels Between 34k34 and 6400k6400
You can play music files (MP3) and still pictures (JPEG) on this unit by
making folders as shown below. However depending on the method of
writing data (writing software), play may not be in the order you number
the folders.
(Sub sampling is 4:2:2 or 4:2:0)
Number of
folders§3
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB] Maximum number of folders
recognizable: 300 folders
[RAM] This unit can handle a maximum of 300
folders
Structure of MP3 folders
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]
Prefix with 3-digit numbers in the order
you want to play them.
Number of files§3
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB] Maximum number of files
recognizable§1: 3000 files
[RAM] This unit can handle a maximum of 3000
files
Root
001 Group
MOTION JPEG
PROGRESSIVE JPEG
Not supported
001.mp3
002.mp3
Order of play
003.mp3
002 Group
≥If there is a large amount of still picture data etc. within an MP3 file,
play may not be possible.
Total number of recognizable file including MP3, JPEG and other
001.mp3
003 Group
002.mp3
003.mp3
004.mp3
§1
type of files is 4000.
It may take a few moments for still pictures to display.
When there are many files and/or folders, some files may not display
§2
001.mp3
002.mp3
003.mp3
§3
Structure of still pictures (folders)
or be playable.
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]
Files inside a folder are displayed in
the order they were updated or taken.
Root
P0000001.jpg
P0000002.jpg
DCIM
XXXXX
XXXX.jpg
002 Folder
Order of play
P0000003.jpg
P0000004.jpg
P0000005.jpg
003 Folder
P0000006.jpg
P0000007.jpg
004 Folder
P0000008.jpg
P0000009.jpg
[RAM]
Root
Folders can be created on other
equipment.
XXXX.jpg
JPEG
§
These folders cannot be
DCIM
XXXXX
selected as a copying
destination.
≥If a folder name or file name has
been input using other
equipment, the name may not
be displayed properly or you
may not be able to play or edit
the data.
XXXX.jpg
DCIM
XXXXX
XXXX.jpg
18
VQT2J51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic
Operati
ons
Watching Television
Refer to “GUIDE Plus+ system” (> 36) for detail information.
This DVD recorder has a tuner which allows it to directly receive and
record digital terrestrial channels.
TV
Preparation:
VOL
CH
DRIVE
≥ Turn on the television and select the appropriate video input to suit the
SELECT
AV
connections to this unit.
Important:
TRACKING/V-LOCK/PAGE
This unit does not have an analogue broadcast tuner.
2 3
1
CH
4 5 6
1
to turn the unit on.
PROG/CHECK
CHAPTER
8 9
7
TV Guide:
Landscape
2
DELETE
I
INPUT
All Types
All Channels
Tue 12th
Tue 12/10/10
19:45
0
SELECT
SLOW/SEARCH
Emmerdale : In today’s show we will...
Time:
RESET
BBC 1
BBC 2
– The GUIDE Plus+ list
appears.
Channel 4
Channel 5
2
SKIP/INDEX
REW
FF
STOP
PAUSE
PLAY
+24 hours
Prog.Type
Category
SELECT
RETURN
OPTION: Select Advert, etc.
info
Page
Page
Guide Change Display Mode
STATUS
EXIT
3
4
OK
3, 4 to select the current programme, then
OK
3, 4 to select “View”, then
OK
OPTION
RETURN
Selecting a Channel without the GUIDE Plus+ system
MANUAL SKIP
-10s
+60s
To select desired channel
Press [W X CH].
REC
REC MODE EXT LINK DIRECT TV REC
To directly enter Channels
TEXT
TIME SLIP
JET REW
STTL
DISPLAY
You can also select channels with the numbered buttons.
e.g., “5”: [0] > [0] > [5] or [5] > [OK]
“15”: [0] > [1] > [5] or [1] > [5] > [OK]
Tips
≥Regarding Digital Channel Information (> 48)
≥If New Channel Message appears (> 49)
≥To select Audio Description, Digital Teletext and subtitles (> 48)
≥To change DVB Multi Audio (> 63, DVB Multi Audio)
Notes
≥The GUIDE Plus+ list is not displayed immediately after initial tuning is done.
Watching Digital Satellite Programmes
You can view the digital satellite programmes via this unit by the following
method when “Power Save in Standby” is activated, and the digital
satellite receiver is not connected to TV.
Preparation:
Tips
≥
Connect a digital satellite receiver to this unit’s AV2 input terminals (
>
11).
≥When “Power Save in Standby” is
deactivated (> 72), you can watch the
digital satellite programme without
turning the unit on.
≥ Turn on the digital satellite receiver.
≥ Turn on the television and select the appropriate video input to suit the
connections to this unit.
Notes
≥You cannot watch digital satellite
programmes during timer recording.
1
to turn the unit on.
to select “AV2”.
INPUT
2
SELECT
19
VQT2J51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback
Preparation:
≥ Turn on the television and select the appropriate video input to suit the
TV
connections to this unit.
VOL
CH
DRIVE
Playing play-only discs
SELECT
AV
Refer to “Advanced Disc Playback” (> 38 to 39) for detailed information
on playback of discs.
TRACKING/V-LOCK/PAGE
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›] [VCD] [CD]
2 3
1
CH
4 5 6
1
to turn the unit on.
PROG/CHECK
CHAPTER
8 9
7
DELETE
e.g.
INPUT
DRIVE
2
3
4
0
SELECT
SLOW/SEARCH
SELECT
RESET
to select the DVD drive.
DVD
VHS
– The DVD indicator lights up on the unit.
SKIP/INDEX
REW
FF
STOP
PAUSE
PLAY
OPEN/CLOSE
to open the tray
(Button located on front of the unit).
STATUS
EXIT
– Insert a disc (> 7) and press [< OPEN/CLOSE] again to close
the tray.
PLAY
OK
OPTION
RETURN
Stopping Play
Pausing Play
Press [∫].
Press [;].
Tips
– The stopped position is memorized. – Press again to restart play.
(Resume play function)
To return to the menu screen
[DVD-V]
1
2
Press [OPTION].
Press [3, 4] to select “Top Menu” or
“Menu” and press [OK].
– The stopped position is cleared
when you press [∫] several times.
[VCD]
Menu Screens on the TV
Press [RETURN ].
Notes
[DVD-V] [VCD]
≥[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
[+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
Generally, menu screens that appear on the TV may be navigated as
follows:
e. g.,
Playback starts from the most recent
recording.
≥[DVD-V] [VCD]
Playback starts from the point specified
by the disc.
≥[CD]
Playback starts from the beginning of
the disc.
DVDTOP MENU
Play
Subtitles
Chapter List
≥Depending on the disc type, playing
may automatically start without
pressing [1] (PLAY).
Trailer
≥The unit takes some time to read the
disc before play starts.
≥DISCS CONTINUE TO ROTATE
WHILE MENUS ARE DISPLAYED.
Press [∫] when you finish to preserve
the unit’s motor and your television
screen.
[DVD-V]
OK
3, 4, 2, 1 to select an item, then
You can sometimes use the numbered buttons to select an item.
[VCD]
≥If “$” appears on the TV, the operation
is prohibited by the unit or disc.
Press the numbered buttons to select an item.
e.g., “5”:
>
, “15”:
>
0 5
1 5
20
VQT2J51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notes
Playing a Video Cassette
≥Tapes are automatically rewound once
they reach the end (except during
Timer recording, fast forwarding, etc.).
≥You may have to adjust the tracking for
tapes recorded on other VCRs (> 41).
In some cases, the picture quality may
still be inferior; this is due to format
constraints.
Refer to “Advanced Video Cassette Playback” (> 40 to 41) for detailed
information on playback of video cassette.
[VHS]
≥If “$” appears on the TV, the operation
is prohibited by the unit or video
cassette.
1
to turn the unit on.
DRIVE
2
DVD
VHS
SELECT
to select the VHS drive.
– The VHS indicator lights up on the unit.
Insert a cassette (> 7).
– Play starts automatically if you insert a cassette with the
accidental erasure tab removed.
3
4
PLAY
Stopping Play
Pausing Play
Press [∫].
Press [;].
– Press again to restart play.
21
VQT2J51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording Television Programmes
Refer to “Notes for Recording” (> 27) and “Advanced Recording” (> 28–
30) for detail information on recording.
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [VHS]
TV
Preparation:
VOL
CH
DRIVE
≥ Turn on the television and select the appropriate video input to suit the
connections to this unit.
SELECT
AV
≥ [RAM] If the disc is protected, release protection (> 64).
≥ [VHS] Ensure accidental erasure tab is intact.
TRACKING/V-LOCK/PAGE
2 3
1
CH
1
4 5 6
to turn the unit on.
PROG/CHECK
CHAPTER
8 9
7
DRIVE
2
3
SELECT
DELETE
INPUT
to select the drive (DVD or VHS).
0
SELECT
RESET
SLOW/SEARCH
Insert a disc or video cassette.
SKIP/INDEX
REW
FF
– Insert a disc or video cassette with enough remaining blank
space (> 7).
STOP
PAUSE
PLAY
– When the format confirmation screen is displayed (> 29).
STATUS
EXIT
4
5
CH
to select desired channel.
REC
OK
– To select with the numbered buttons (> 19).
– When no channel setting is performed on the unit and broadcast
is recorded directly from the digital satellite receiver, select a
channel on the connected equipment, then press
[INPUT SELECT] to select “AV2”.
OPTION
RETURN
MANUAL SKIP
-10s
+60s
REC
REC MODE EXT LINK DIRECT TV REC
e.g.,
REC MODE
Recording Mode
Rec Mode
XP
Remain
0:16
TEXT
TIME SLIP
JET REW
STTL
DISPLAY
to select the
0:32
1:05
2:11
recording mode. (> 28)
SP
LP
Notes
EP
≥[RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] To use
a new disc, formatting is necessary.
(> 29, 64)
SELECT
REC
≥[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
It takes about 30 seconds for the unit
to complete recording management
information after recording finishes.
≥You cannot change the channel or
recording mode during recording.
≥This unit cannot record NTSC signals
to discs that already have PAL signal
recordings.
6
to start recording.
REC
Elapsed recording time
≥Depending on the type of disc used for
recording or the type of broadcast,
there may be restrictions on the title
you are trying to record. (> 27)
≥[VHS]
– Even if the video cassette is labelled
“S-VHS”, it is not possible to record
in the S-VHS system with this unit.
This unit records in the normal VHS
system.
Pausing Recording
Stopping Recording
Press [;].
Press [∫].
– Press again to restart recording.
(The title is not divided.)
Tips
≥If a programme to record has subtitles, Audio Description or multiple audio, you can record
with these items. They cannot be switched after recording.
– To record with subtitles
– When recording is paused for
5 minutes or more, the unit returns
to stop.
Before starting the recording, show the subtitles (> 48). If the programme has multiple
subtitle, select the desired language (> 67).
– To record with Audio Description
Before starting the recording, turn on the Audio Description and set the volume (> 48).
– To record with the selected audio
Before starting the recording, select the desired audio channel or language, if the
programme has multiple audio channel or language (> 63, 67).
≥(Except for [VHS] )To record sound using LPCM (XP mode only):
Set the “Audio Mode for XP Recording” to “LPCM” in the Setup menu (> 69)
22
VQT2J51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Timer Recording
What is FREEVIEWTM?
FREEVIEW is the function that enables timer recordings to be controlled by the signal sent
from the broadcaster. “Guide Link” is available.
TV
“Guide Link” – If you set a timer recording from the TV Guide, the recording’s start and stop
times can be controlled by the broadcaster, e.g. delayed start.
This is indicated by “Guide Link” in the Timer Recording screen in step 2 (> below).
VOL
CH
DRIVE
SELECT
AV
If you set a timer recording from the TV Guide, the recording’s start and stop times are
controlled by the signal sent from the broadcaster. If the signal is not sent correctly,
the recording may lack the beginning or the ending part of the programmes.
In order to make the timer recording work successfully, we recommend you set the
start time earlier and the end time later by some minutes, up to a maximum of 10
minutes for Guide Link to function.
TRACKING/V-LOCK/PAGE
2 3
1
CH
e.g. When you set the timer recording for a programme that will start at 10:00 and end
at 11:00, set “9:58” and “11:05” in step 3 (> below).
4 5 6
PROG/CHECK
CHAPTER
8 9
0
7
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [VHS]
DELETE
INPUT
Preparation:
SELECT
≥ Turn on the television and select the appropriate video input to suit the
connections to this unit.
RESET
SLOW/SEARCH
≥ Turn on this unit.
SKIP/INDEX
REW
FF
≥ Insert a disc or video cassette that you use for recording (> 7).
≥ [RAM] If the disc is protected, release protection (> 64).
≥ [VHS] Ensure accidental erasure tab is intact.
≥ Confirm that the clock on the unit’s display is set to the correct time.
STOP
PAUSE
PLAY
STATUS
EXIT
1
I
– The GUIDE Plus+ list appears.
OK
3, 4, 2, 1 to select the future programme,
2
OK
then
OPTION
RETURN
1:34 SP
2:59 SP
Timer
Remain
DVD
VHS
TV Guide:
Landscape
Recording
SUN 10/10/10 19:45:00
Mode STTL AD
All Types
All Channels
Sun 10th
Sun 10/10/10
19:45
2
BBC 2
Time:
Holiday Programme
Tips
Stop
Channel
Date
Start
Drive
BBC
BBC
1
2
OFF
2
BBC 2 10/10 SUN 20:30 22:30 DVD
SP
OFF
≥To check programmes (> 34)
≥To cancel a timer recording
programming
All Channels : BBC 2
Channel
Channel
2
4
Holiday Programme
(Guide Link)
Programme Name
5
Press OK to store the programme.
1
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the
programme (the timer icon is
displayed) and press [OK].
While “Delete” is selected, press
[OK].
-24 hours
+24 hours
Prog.Type
Category
OK
DELETE
0
9
TIMER REC
RETURN
OPTION: Select Advert, etc.
info
Number
--
Page
Page
RETURN
Guide Change Display Mode
2
“Guide Link” is displayed here.
3
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
press [OK].
– The timer icon disappears.
Confirm the programme
(start and end time) by TV
magazine, etc. and correct if
necessary using
3
≥To record sound using LPCM (XP
mode only):
Set the “Audio Mode for XP Recording”
to “LPCM” in the Setup menu (> 69)
Timer icon
3, 4, 2, 1 then
OK
– The settings are stored and the timer programme is on.
– The timer icon is displayed.
– “F” lights on the unit’s display to indicate timer recording standby has been
activated.
– Repeat steps 2–3 to programme other recordings.
– Press [Í] to turn the unit off.
Notes
≥[RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] To use a new disc, formatting is necessary. (> 29, 64)
≥The GUIDE Plus+ list is not displayed immediately after initial tuning is done.
≥The GUIDE Plus+ system will not work if the clock is not set correctly.
≥If “NTSC” has been selected for “TV System” (> 70), the GUIDE Plus+ system cannot be
used.
≥“Guide Link” will not be displayed and will not function under the following conditions.
– Timer programmes set manually (> 33).
– Timer programmes set from the TV Guide are modified or start/stop time changed by
more than 10 minutes from original time.
“FR” recording mode is not available when the timer programme is controlled by “Guide Link”.
≥
≥The receipt of the GUIDE Plus+ system data is only possible via the aerial input of this unit.
The receipt of the TV Guide data via externally connected satellite receivers is not possible.
≥If you set a timer recording that will overlap with other timer recordings, the “Overlapped
Timer Recording” screen appears to help you resolve the overlapping.
Follow the on-screen instructions.
23
≥Simultaneous recording to both DVD and VHS is not possible.
VQT2J51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying Titles (One Touch Copy)
Refer to “Copying Titles or Playlists” (> 57 to 59) for detail information on
copying.
Copying Titles (VHS J DVD)
Programmes are automatically copied onto the disc from the location of
playback at the time when the copying of the tape starts.
COPYING
VHS
DVD
[VHS] > [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
Preparation:
≥ Turn on the television and select the appropriate video input to suit the
connections to this unit.
COPYING indicator
≥ [RAM] If the disc protected, release protection (> 64).
≥ Insert a disc with enough space for recording.
≥ Select the DVD recording mode (> 28).
TV
≥ Insert the video cassette containing the programme to be copied.
≥ Press [1] (PLAY) to play the video cassette and then press and hold
[STTL ] for about 5 or more seconds to select the audio type you wish
to record.
VOL
CH
DRIVE
SELECT
AV
≥ Stop the tape at the point where you want to start copying from.
TRACKING/V-LOCK/PAGE
On the main unit
2 3
4 5 6
1
CH
While both DVD and VHS are stopped
1
PROG/CHECK
CHAPTER
Press and hold for about 3 seconds.
8 9
7
DELETE
INPUT
0
SELECT
ヤヰヱヺリワヨ
VHS
DVD
RESET
SLOW/SEARCH
SKIP/INDEX
REW
FF
STOP
PAUSE
PLAY
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
STATUS
EXIT
REC
2a
to copy and automatically finalise
I
when done
finalising).
(see page 65 for more information on
–If you press [∫], you can cancel copying.
OK
- or -
OPTION
RETURN
2b
PLAY
to copy without finalising.
MANUAL SKIP
-10s
+60s
–If you press [∫], you can cancel copying.
– Check if copying starts properly (“COPY” lights on the unit’s display).
– Copying is automatically completed when the tape reaches its end or
the disc becomes full.
REC
TEXT
REC MODE EXT LINK DIRECT TV REC
TIME SLIP
STTL
DISPLAY
Tips
Notes
≥Dividing a title to be copied
When copying from VHS to DVD, titles on the DVD are divided according to index signals
detected on the tape.
– Titles that are too short may not be divided correctly.
– The recording time may become longer than the original title depending on the number
of index signals.
≥[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
If copying doesn’t complete due to
shortage of disc space or other
reasons, finalising won’t start.
≥When copying doesn’t start, the
“COPYING” indicator on the main unit
blinks for about 7 seconds. Check if
the unit is properly prepared.
≥To cancel copying in the middle
Press [∫].
– You can also press and hold [RETURN ] for about 3 or more seconds to cancel
copying in the middle. However, you cannot stop finalising after it has started.
≥Titles are copied at normal speed.
24
VQT2J51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying Titles or Playlists (DVD J VHS)
All titles on the disc are automatically copied onto the tape.
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [-RW‹VR›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] > [VHS]
Preparation:
COPYING
VHS
DVD
≥ Turn on the television and select the appropriate video input to suit the
connections to this unit.
≥ [VHS] Ensure accidental erasure tab is intact.
≥ Insert a video cassette with enough space for recording. Stop the tape
at the point where you want to start copying to.
≥ Select the VHS recording mode (> 28).
COPYING indicator
≥ Insert the disc containing the programme to be copied.
≥ [RAM] [-RW‹VR›] Press and hold [STTL ] for about 5 or more seconds to
select the audio you wish to record.
On the main unit
Press and hold for about 3 seconds.
ヤヰヱヺリワヨ
VHS
DVD
– Check if copying starts properly (“COPY” lights on the unit’s display).
– Copying automatically stops when playback of the disc finishes or the
tape reaches its end.
Tips
≥When you start copying from the selected title
1
2
3
4
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the title you want to start recording, then press [OK].
Go to the operation shown above.
≥Index signals are automatically recorded on the tape according to the division of titles on
the DVD [> 40, VHS Index Search System (VISS)].
≥To cancel copying in the middle
Press [∫].
– You can also press and hold [RETURN ] for about 3 or more seconds to cancel
copying in the middle.
Notes
≥If you start copying when the resume function is activated, the DVD is copied from the
beginning of the title you stopped play at.
To copy a whole disc, press [∫] to deactivate it before copying (> 20).
≥When copying doesn’t start, the “COPYING” indicator on the main unit blinks for about
7 seconds. Check if the unit is properly prepared.
≥[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
You cannot copy the content of a finalised disc.
≥Titles are copied at normal speed.
To copy from a finalised disc
(> 59, Copying a finalised DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R and
+R DL)
25
VQT2J51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Deleting Titles
Preparation:
≥ Turn on the television and select the appropriate video input to suit the
connections to this unit.
≥ [RAM] If the disc is protected, release protection (> 64).
≥ Insert the disc containing the programme to be deleted.
TV
VOL
CH
DRIVE
Important:
SELECT
AV
Once deleted, contents cannot be recovered.
TRACKING/V-LOCK/PAGE
DELETE Navigator
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
2 3
1
CH
4 5 6
DRIVE
1
SELECT
PROG/CHECK
CHAPTER
to select the DVD drive.
8 9
7
DELETE
INPUT
0
With the unit stopped
SELECT
FUNCTION MENU
2
DVD-RAM
Disc Protection Off
RESET
SLOW/SEARCH
Playback
Recording
Delete
Video
Picture
Copy
SKIP/INDEX
REW
FF
TV Guide
Others
STOP
PAUSE
PLAY
Drive Select
OK
RETURN
STATUS
EXIT
3
4
OK
OK
3, 4 to select “Delete”, then
3, 4 to select “Video”, then
OK
FUNCTION MENU
DELETE Navigator
DVD-RAM
Title View
VIDEO
PICTURE
DVD-RAM
Disc Protection Off
- -
- -
07
08
Playback
Video
Picture
Recording
Delete
OPTION
RETURN
BBC
- -
1
10/10 FRI
BBC
- -
1
11/10 SAT
Copy
TV Guide
Others
MANUAL SKIP
Drive Select
OK
-10s
+60s
Previous
Next
Select Previous
Page 02/02
RETURN
OK
OPTION
Next
RETURN
5
6
PAUSE
Notes
3, 4, 2, 1 to select the title, then
≥You cannot delete while recording or
copying.
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all
necessary items.
≥[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] Even if you have set
protection on other equipment, such titles
are deleted.
≥[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
It is not possible to delete contents from
finalised disc.
≥[-R] [-R]DL] [+R] [+R]DL] Available disc space
does not increase after deletion.
≥[RAM] Deleting an item increases the
available disc space by the amount of
space taken by the item deleted.
≥[-RW‹V›] [+RW] Available disc space
increases when you delete the last title.
≥[RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+RW] To recover total disc
space, the disc needs to be formatted.
(> 64)
Press [;] again to cancel.
OK
7
OK
2 to select “Delete”, then
Tips
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
To view other pages
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next”, then press [OK].
≥You can also press [:, 9] to view other pages.
Deleting Titles During Playback
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
During playback
DELETE
1
2
OK
2 to select “Delete”, then
26
VQT2J51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanc
ed
Featur
es
Notes for Recording
Broadcast in multi-channel sound:
You can select audio language when received audio in multi-
channel broadcast (“Multi Audio” appears at the bottom of digital
channel information display).
Hello
Hola
Hallo
Selecting
audio for
recording
Select the audio that you
want to record in “DVB Multi
Audio” in the on-screen
display (> 63).
However, audio cannot be switched after recording.
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [VHS]
The original aspect used for the source programme will also be
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
The programme will be recorded in 4:3 aspect.
About the
used with the recording.
aspect when
recording a
programme
However, in the following case, programme will be recorded in
4:3.
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]
Programme recorded using “EP” or “FR (recordings 5 hours or
longer)” recording modes will be recorded in 4:3 aspect.
≥It is not possible to record the broadcasts that allow “One time only recording” onto DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW,
+R, +R DL, +RW or 8 cm DVD-RAM discs. Use the CPRM (> 92) compatible DVD-RAM.
[RAM] CPRM compatible discs only.
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
Copy-once
recording
12 cm
–—
(≤: Can do, –: Cannot do)
≥Even when copying to video tape the title may not be copied correctly because of the copy guard.
≥You cannot copy a playlist created from “One time only recording” titles.
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
The disc must be finalised after recording or copying (> 65).
It is necessary to finalise DVD-R, etc. on this unit after recording or copying titles to them. You can then play them in
the same way as a commercially sold DVD-Video. However, the discs become play-only and you can no longer record
or copy.§
§
You can record and copy again if you format DVD-RW.
Playing the
disc on other
DVD players
Record to DVD-R, etc.
Play on other DVD equipment
H
H
SEARC
R
ENTE
V
OL
I
S
P
L
A
Y
D
M
ENU
T
OP
RN
RETU
N
MENU
OFF
/I
D
O
U
B
L
E
R
E
-
M
A
S
T
E
R
C
D
S
E
Q
U
E
N
T
I
A
L
DISC
1
2
3
4
5
/
/
D
I
S
C
E
X
C
H
A
N
G
E
D
I
S
C
S
K
I
P
OPEN/CLOSE
D
C
I
9
V
OPEN
ND
ROU
A
.
S
U
R
E
EA
T
REP
T
OR
MOD
MONI
E
MOD
URE
PICT
Finalise
[+RW]
If the disc failed to play on other equipment, we recommend you create top menu (> 65). However, even with Top
Menu, +RW may not play on other players.
DVD-R DL and +R DL discs have two layers of recording surface on one side.
≥It is not possible to record continuously from the first layer to the second layer. Recording stops when space
on the first layer becomes full. You must close the first layer to start recording on the second layer (> 65).
Closing makes the first layer unavailable for recording (editing is still available). You cannot cancel closing. Make
certain before proceeding.
DVD-R DL
+R DL
Second recordable layer
Recording to
DVD-R DL
and +R DL
The available
space
It is not possible to
record continuously
from the first layer to
the second layer
(Inner section
of the disc)
First recordable layer
Title 1
Title 2
(Outer section
of the disc)
Recording/Playback direction
≥It is not possible to record to DVD or VHS drive while recording to the other drive.
27
VQT2J51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Recording
DVD Recording Modes and Durations
Depending on the content being recorded, the recording times may become shorter than indicated.
(The times provided on this table are an estimate.)
DVD-R
DVD-RW
+R
DVD-RAM
DVD-R DL§3, +R DL§3 (8.5 GB)
Double-
Recording Mode
Single-sided
(4.7 GB)
First layer
(L0)
Second layer
(L1)
sided§1
+RW
(9.4 GB)
(4.7 GB)
XP
1 hour
2 hours
2 hours
4 hours
8 hours
1 hour
2 hours
55 minutes
50 minutes
(High quality)
SP
1 hour 50 minutes
1 hour 40 minutes
(Standard play)
LP
4 hours
4 hours
3 hours 40 minutes
7 hours 25 minutes
3 hours 20 minutes
6 hours 50 minutes
(Long play)
16 (12§2)
hours
EP
8 (6§2) hours
8 (6§2) hours
2
2
(Extra long play)
(5 hours 30 minutes§ )
(5 hours 15 minutes§ )
FR
(Flexible
Recording)
8 hours
maximum
16 hours
maximum
8 hours
maximum
7 hours 25 minutes
maximum
6 hours 50 minutes
maximum
§1
It is not possible to record or play continuously from one side of a
double sided disc to the other.
When “Recording time in EP mode” has been set to “EP ( 6 hours )”
Tips
≥Maximum number of titles to a disc
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] 99 titles on a disc
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] 49 titles on a disc
§2
in the Setup menu (> 68).
The sound quality is better when using “EP ( 6 hours )” than when
using “EP ( 8 hours )”.
≥FR (Flexible recording mode)
§3
Using “Flexible Recording” is convenient in these kinds of situations:
– When the amount of free space on the disc makes selecting an
appropriate recording mode difficult
Refer to “Recording to DVD-R DL and +R DL” (> 27).
– When you want to record a long programme with the best picture
quality possible
XP
SP
e.g., Recording a 90-minute programme to 4.7 GB DVD-RAM disc:
− If you select XP mode, the programme will not fit on one disc.
LP
A second disc is necessary for
30 minutes of the programme.
EP (6 hours) 2
EP (8 hours)
− If you select SP mode, the programme will fit on one disc.
Notes
However there will be 30 minutes
remaining disc space.
≥This unit uses variable bit rate (VBR) recording which varies the
amount of data recorded to suit the picture quality, so actual recording
times and remaining recording times shown by the unit will be
different. ([-R]DL] [+R]DL] The difference will be especially noticeable.)
Use a disc with enough remaining blank space.
−
If you select “Flexible Recording” the programme will fit on one
disc perfectly.
≥When recording to DVD-RAM using EP ( 8 hours ) mode, play may
not be possible on DVD players, even if they are compatible with
DVD-RAM. In this case use EP ( 6 hours ) mode.
You can set FR mode when programming timer recordings and
flexible recording (> 30).
VHS Recording Modes and Durations
Recording Mode
SP
Durations
Tips
≥To prevent recording errors:
You can record the length shown on the tape.
≥ If the image quality is important to you
or if you wish to store the tape for a
long period, select this mode.
2 times the length of SP mode.
≥ LP cannot be selected when recording
NTSC signals.
Set a timer recording period slightly longer than the actual programme
(to make sure the programme is recorded in full).
≥AUTO Mode
Timer Recording
LP
2nd programme
(45 min)
1st programme
(30 min)
≥ The unit can play tapes recorded in LP
mode on other equipment.
3 times the length of SP mode.
Automatically switches the recording mode
to LP (NTSC to EP) mode during a timer
recording if there is not enough tape left to
record the programme in SP mode.
Video tape
(e.g.: 60-minute cassette)
15 min 30 min
at SP at LP
30 min at SP
EP
AUTO
– The tape length must be set correctly (> 71).
– Picture distortion may occur when the recording mode switches.
– This may not work correctly with some video cassettes.
– It may not work correctly when “NTSC” is set as the “TV System”
(> 70).
28
VQT2J51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the format confirmation screen is
displayed
Specifying the Recording Time
—One Touch Recording
Formatting is the process of making media such as DVD-
RAM recordable on recording equipment.
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [VHS]
This function allows specifying the length of recording
time up to 4 hours.
Important:
Formatting permanently deletes all disc contents
(including the contents that have been recorded on a
PC), regardless of protection status of disc.
During recording
On the main unit only
ンユヤ
[RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
repeatedly until the desired time
is reached.
The following screen may
appear when inserting a new
disc or a disc that has been
recorded on another
– The recording time and the unit’s display changes as
follows:
equipment.
Counter (Cancel) __#OFF0:30__#OFF1:00
Only format the disc if you
intend to use it for recording.
SELECT
:
v
OK
RETURN
OFF4:00
OFF1:30
Do not format if you intend to view pre-recorded titles or
contents from the disc.
^___ OFF3:00 (_ OFF2:00 (_--b
OK
Notes
2 to select “Yes”, then
≥This function does not work during timer recording or Flexible
Recording.
≥Recording stops and the set time is cleared if you press [∫].
≥This unit is turned to standby mode when this unit is not operated for
approximately 5 minutes after completing One Touch Recording, if
“Auto Standby after OTR” is set to “On” in the Setup menu. (Default
setting: “On”) (> 72)
Tips
Refer to “Formatting Discs” (> 64) for more detail of formatting.
When removing a Recorded or Copied
Disc
Direct TV Recording
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] e.g. Disc recorded with
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
Videos
After recording or copying, if
This function allows you to immediately start recording
the programme that you are viewing on the TV without
having to change the channels on this unit.
You can use the function when you connect the unit to a
Q Link compatible TV using a 21-pin Scart cable.
Finalise
you press [< OPEN/CLOSE]
to eject the disc, the following
screen may appear.
Finalise the disc so that it can be played
on other DVD players.
Note : Recording or Editing is not possible
after finalising. This may take up to min.
Press the REC button to start finalise.
Finalising
Press the OPEN/CLOSE button to exit.
DVD-R, etc. recorded or
You can also use this function using VIERA Link. (> 46)
This disc cannot be played on other
DVD players without finalising.
copied on this unit cannot be
played on other players
DIRECT TV REC
immediately after recording
or copying. Using the Finalise feature allows you to play
these discs on other players.
Once the disc is finalised you will no longer be able to
record onto the disc.
Press and hold for about
1 second.
[However if you format the DVD-RW, you can record and
copy onto the disc again. (> 64)]
Tips
To stop recording
Press [∫].
REC
Notes
to start finalising.
≥When Digital Teletext (> 48) is displayed, Direct TV recording is
unavailable.
or
≥If you switch TV channels while using Direct TV recording, the Direct
TV recording stops.
≥When “EXT-L” lights on the unit’s display (> 31), Direct TV recording
is unavailable.
OPEN/CLOSE
to eject the disc without
finalising.
Notes
≥You cannot stop finalising once you have started it.
Tips
≥If you want to provide the disc with a name or set play menu select,
select “Disc Name” or “Auto-Play Select” in “DVD Management”
before finalising. (> 64)
≥Refer to “Finalising” (> 65) for more detail of finalising.
29
VQT2J51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Recording
Flexible Recording
Playing while you are recording
Chasing Playback
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
The unit sets the best possible picture quality that fits the
programme within the remaining disc space.
The recording mode becomes FR mode. Refer to “FR
(Flexible recording mode)” (> 28).
[RAM]
Allows playback from the beginning of the title you are
recording.
During recording
Preparation:
PLAY
≥ Select the channel or the external input to record.
≥ Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.
Tips
To stop play
Press [∫] once.
With the unit stopped
1
To stop recording
2 seconds after play stops, press [∫].
To stop timer recording
2 seconds after play stops,
1
2
Press [∫].
Press [2, 1] to select “Stop Recording”, then press [OK].
Simultaneous Record and Playback
2
OK
3, 4 to select “Others”, then
[RAM] [VHS]
Allows playback of a previous title, while recording
something else.
≥ You can play DVD or VHS while recording to the other
drive. The recording will not be affected.
– DVD playback (> 20, 38, 39)
– VHS playback (> 21, 40, 41)
Flexible Rec
3, 4 to select
3
Record in FR mode.
“Flexible Rec”,
Maximum rec. time
8 hour 00 min.
Set rec. time
8 hour 00 min.
then
OK
Start
Cancel
SELECT
Notes
RETURN
VHS cannot be output via “DVD priority out” while recording on DVD
(> 75). You can watch the VHS playback by connecting 21-pin Scart
cable from AV1 on the unit to the television.
2, 1 to select “hour” and “min.”
and 3, 4 to set the recording
time.
4
5
Preparation:
≥ Select the appropriate AV input of the television.
≥ Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the drive.
– You can set “hour” and “min.” using the
numbered buttons.
[RAM]
During recording
When you want to start recording
3, 4, 2, 1 to select “Start”, then
1
OK
– Recording starts.
Notes
3, 4, 2, 1 to select the title to
2
≥You cannot record more than 8 hours.
play, then
OK
Tips
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
[VHS]
To stop recording partway
Press [∫].
During recording
PLAY
To show the remaining recording time
Press [STATUS ] to show the remaining recording time.
e.g., DVD-RAM
Tips
To stop play
DVD-RAM
Press [∫].
Remaining time
REC 0:59
1 DVBꢀ
BBC ONE Wales
To exit the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
To stop recording
After play stops
1
2
3
[RAM] Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR] to exit the screen.
Press [∫].
If the recording stop confirmation screen is displayed, press [2, 1]
to select “Yes” or “Stop Recording” and press [OK] to stop recording.
Notes
≥During playing while you are recording, you cannot edit or delete titles.
30
VQT2J51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording from a Digital Satellite Receiver
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [VHS]
Linked timer recordings with external
equipment (SKY Digital STB/digital
satellite receiver) — EXT LINK
To record programmes from a SKY Digital STB/digital
satellite receiver using timer programming
Manual Recording
Preparation:
≥ [RAM] If the disc is protected, release protection
(> 64).
≥ [VHS] Ensure accidental erasure tab is intact.
≥ Connect a digital satellite receiver to this unit’s AV2
input terminals (> 11).
≥ Set the “AV2 Input” to match the connected
equipment in the Setup menu (> 71).
≥ When the output signal from the external equipment
is NTSC, change the “TV System” to “NTSC” in the
Setup menu (> 70).
Preparation:
≥ [RAM] If the disc is protected, release protection
(> 64).
≥ [VHS] Ensure accidental erasure tab is intact.
≥ Make sure you connect the AV2 terminal of this unit to
“VCR Scart Terminal” of a SKY Digital STB/digital
satellite receiver with a 21-pin scart cable (> 11).
≥ Set the “AV2 Input” and “Ext Link” to match the
connected equipment in the Setup menu (> 71).
With the unit stopped
1
INPUT
SELECT
to select “AV2” for the digital
Make timer programming on SKY
1
Digital STB/digital satellite receiver.
satellite receiver you have
connected.
– Refer to the equipment’s operating
instructions.
DRIVE
DRIVE
2
2
SELECT
SELECT
to select the DVD or VHS
to select the DVD or VHS
drive.
drive.
– Insert a disc or video cassette with enough
– Insert a disc or video cassette with enough
remaining blank space (> 7).
remaining blank space (> 7).
REC MODE
3
EXT LINK
3
to select the recording
mode.
– The unit turns off and “EXT-L” lights on the
unit’s display to indicate timer recording
standby has been activated.
– While the unit is in EXT LINK standby mode or
recording, most operations on this unit are
prohibited ([< OPEN/CLOSE], [Í/I] etc.).
Select the channel on the digital
satellite receiver.
4
REC
5
to start recording.
Tips
To cancel the external control
Press [EXT LINK] to stop recording or to cancel linked timer recording
standby (The unit turns on and “EXT-L” disappears.).
Tips
To skip unwanted parts
Manual timer recordings (> 33)
Press [;] to pause recording. (Press again to restart recording.)
≥[VHS] When recording is paused for 5 minutes or more, the unit returns
to stop.
Notes
≥In order to prevent accidental operation, press [EXT LINK] to cancel
the setting after recording is finished.
To stop recording
Press [∫].
≥This function does not work when “TV System” is set to “NTSC” in the
Setup menu (> 70).
≥This function does not work with some equipment. Refer to the
equipment’s operating instructions.
≥The beginnings of recordings may not be recorded correctly in some
cases.
Notes
≥This unit cannot record NTSC signals to discs that already have PAL
signal recordings.
≥When “Ext Link” is set to “Ext Link 2”, this function does not work if the
input signal is NTSC system.
≥Programmes are recorded as one title on this unit when the end time
of the earlier timer recording and the start time of the later timer
recording are close to each other.
[RAM] To divide the titles, go to “Divide Title” (> 51).
≥When this unit is in EXT LINK standby (“EXT-L” is shown on the unit’s
display), the TV Guide data cannot be downloaded.
≥While the unit is in EXT LINK standby mode or recording, AV1 output
terminal outputs the signal which is input from the AV2 input terminal
irrespective of “AV1 Output” setting (> 71).
≥(Except for [VHS] ) During EXT LINK standby mode or recording,
playback is only available if you select the DVD drive in the step 2
above.
≥When “EXT-L” lights on the unit’s display, Direct TV Recording is
unavailable.
31
VQT2J51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording from an External Device
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [VHS]
≥Turn off the unit and other video equipment before connecting.
≥Refer to “Adding a VCR: Connecting to a Television and a Video
Cassette Recorder” when connecting to the AV2 input terminals on
the rear panel. (> 75)
Recording to DVD
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
Perform steps 1 - 3 (> left).
Start play on the external device.
4
5
REC
This unit
at the point you want to start
AV3 IN
S VIDEO
VIDEO
L /MONO AUDIO
R
recording to the disc.
Recording to VHS
S Video
cable§1
Audio/video cable§2
[VHS]
Perform steps 1 - 3 (> left).
Other video
equipment
4
PLAY
Connect to Audio/Video output terminals.
to bring the tape to the
§1
You can get a sharper, clearer picture by connecting with an S Video
cable instead of the yellow video cable.
Connect to terminals of the same colour.
point at which you want to start
recording from.
§2
≥If the audio output of the external device is monaural, connect to L/
MONO on the AV3 input terminals at the front.
PAUSE
5
6
when you reach that point.
Preparation:
≥ Turn on the unit.
≥ [RAM] If the disc is protected, release protection
(> 64).
REC
≥ [VHS] Ensure accidental erasure tab is intact.
≥ When the output signal from the external device is
NTSC, change the “TV System” to “NTSC” in the
Setup menu (> 70).
This unit cannot record NTSC signals to discs that
already have PAL signal recordings.
≥ To reduce noise in input from an external device, set
“Copy NR” to “On” in the on-screen display (> 63).
to put the unit in recording
standby.
Start play on the external device.
7
8
PAUSE
to start recording at the point
you desire.
DRIVE
to select the DVD or VHS
drive.
1
SELECT
Tips
To skip unwanted parts
Press [;] to pause recording. (Press again to restart recording.)
– Insert a disc or video cassette with enough
remaining blank space (> 7).
To stop recording
Press [∫].
REC MODE
2
3
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
≥Using Flexible Recording (> 30), you can record the content of a
video cassette (approx. 1–8 hours) to a 4.7 GB disc with the best
possible quality of recording without wasting disc space.
to select the recording
mode (> 28).
Notes
INPUT
≥When timer recording starts while recording from an external device,
timer recording takes priority and recording from the external device
stops.
SELECT
to select the input where
your external device is connected.
≥If video is copied from another piece of equipment to this unit, then the
video quality will be degraded.
≥Almost all videos and DVD-Video on sale have been treated to
prevent illegal copying. Any software that has been so treated cannot
be recorded using this unit.
– Front panel inputs are AV3.
32
VQT2J51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Timer Recording
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [VHS]
4
OK
Manual timer recordings
– The timer icon is displayed in the left column.
Preparation:
≥ Turn on the television and select the appropriate video input
to suit the connections to this unit.
≥ [RAM] If the disc is protected, release protection (> 64).
≥ [VHS] Ensure accidental erasure tab is intact.
≥ Insert a disc or a video cassette with enough remaining
blank space.
≥ Confirm that the clock on the unit’s display is set to the
correct time.
≥ If connected via a digital satellite receiver, please ensure
before a timer recording starts the required channel is set
on the digital satellite receiver.
No. Channel
15
01
BBC 1
– “F” lights on the unit’s display to indicate timer
recording standby has been activated.
– Repeat steps 2–4 to programme other recordings.
– Press [Í] to turn the unit off.
Notes
1:34 SP
Timer
Remain
DVD
PROG/CHECK
≥“F” on the unit’s display flashes when the unit cannot go to timer
Recording
1
VHS 2:59 SP TUE 12/10/10 12:54:00
Drive
recording standby.
No. Channel Date Start Stop Drive Mode STTL AD
New Timer Programme
space
≥
If two timer recording times overlap, the first recording always has priority.
The second recording will start only after the first recording has finished.
≥Recorded subtitles cannot be deleted later.
≥A timer recording will not start while a disc is being formatted, deleted
or finalised. The recording begins afterwards.
≥When “Channel” is set in “AV1”, “AV2” or “AV3”, “STTL” and “AD”
setting is unavailable.
Press OK to store new programme.
OK
RETURN
≥Recorded Audio Description cannot be deleted.
3, 4 to select “New Timer
Tips
2
3
To exit the timer recording list
OK
Press [PROG/CHECK].
Programme”, then
≥“Date” Setting
Each press of [3] changes items in the order below.
(Each press of [4] changes items in the reverse order.)
≥ If “New Timer Programme” is already selected,
press [OK].
Current date
One month later
minus one day
ꢀꢁꢂꢁꢂꢁꢂꢁꢀ
1:34 SP
VHS 2:59 SP TUE 12/10/10 12:54:00
Timer
Remain
DVD
2, 1 to move
through the
items and
3, 4 to set
the items.
Recording
ꢄ
SAT
SUN-SAT
MON-SAT
Channel
Date
Start Stop
Mode STTL AD
SP --- ---
Drive
-- / -- --- -- : -- -- : -- ---
All Channels : -----
Please set Channel.
ꢁ ꢀ
ꢃ ꢃ ꢃ
Programme Name
SUN
MON-FRI
Weekly timer Daily timer
≥You can also use the numbered buttons to enter “Channel”, “Date”,
“Start” and “Stop”.
OK
Change
0
9
Number
--
Category
RETURN
≥
You can also press [DRIVE SELECT] to switch the drive, [REC MODE] to
Channel:
– TV Station Name/External Input
switch “Mode” and press [STTL ] to switch “STTL”.
≥When recording digital satellite programmes, select “AV2”.
Language for broadcast with multi-audio
or multi-subtitle
≥You can press the “Blue” button to change the category. [e.g.,
Free Channels, Radio, Registered Favourites (> 66, Favourites
Edit)]
Date:
In timer recording of broadcast with multi-audio or multi-subtitle,
audio and subtitle language to be recorded will follow the setting
of “DVB Preferred Multi Audio” and “DVB Preferred Subtitles” in
the Setup menu (> 67)
– You can set a daily or weekly programme (> right, Tips).
Start (start time)/Stop (end time):
– Hold button to change in 30-minute increments or decrements.
Drive:
– DVD or VHS
Mode:
To cancel a timer recording in progress
– Recording mode (> 28)
Preparation:
STTL [Subtitles (> 48)]§1, §2
:
≥ Turn on the television and select the appropriate video input
to suit the connections to this unit.
– AUTO/OFF
AD [Audio Description (> 48)]§1, §3
:
– AUTO/OFF
Programme Name:
While the unit is on
1
Press [OK] (> 49, Entering Text).
STOP
§1
If “AUTO” is selected, and if the programme includes the information
of subtitles or Audio Description, they are automatically recorded
with the programme.
– Confirmation screen appears.
§2
When there are multiple languages, select the subtitle language
(> 67, DVB Preferred Subtitles)
You can switch the Audio Description and change its volume during
timer recording.
§3
2
OK
2
to select “Stop Recording”, then
Notes
≥Recording stops and the timer programme is deleted. (Daily and
weekly timer programmes remain and timer recording will start from
the next time the timer recording is set.)
33
VQT2J51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Timer Recording
If the “Overlapped Timer Recording”
screen appears
DELETE
2a
2b
to delete.
If you set a timer recording that will overlap with other
timer recordings using the GUIDE Plus+ system, the
“Overlapped Timer Recording” screen appears to help
you eliminate the overlapping.
– You cannot delete programmes that are
currently recording.
Follow the on-screen instructions.
OK
to modify the programme.
Check, Change, Delete Programmes, or
Resolve Overlapping
3, 4, 2, 1 to make changes,
then
OK
The timer recording list can be viewed even when the unit
is off.
When a programme with
is selected
2c
PROG/CHECK
1
OK
then 3, 4 to select the
– If the programme was set from the TV Guide,
the available repeat programmes are
displayed. Press [3, 4] to select, then press
[OK].
– If the on-screen instructions do not appear,
change or delete the overlapped programme.
programme.
Timer
Remain
DVD
VHS
1:34 SP
2:59 SP TUE 12/10/10 12:54:00
Drive
Recording
No. Channel Date Start Stop Drive Mode STTL AD
New Timer Programme
space
Tips
≥You can enter up to 16 programmes a month in advance.
Press OK to store new programme.
OK
You can also delete a programme with the following steps.
RETURN
1
2
Press [3, 4] to select the programme and press [OPTION].
Press [3, 4] to select “Delete” and press [OK].
A Timer Recording screen icons
To exit the timer recording list
Press [PROG/CHECK].
F:
μ:
Timer programme is active.
Currently recording
:
Programmes are overlapped. Recording of the programme
with the later start time starts when the earlier programme
finishes recording.
Notes
≥Recording may fail if there are changes to the station’s programming.
≥“F” disappears from the unit’s display when no timer programme is
set or when all timer programmes are deactivated.
≥The “Guide Link” function may not work if you manually change the
start/end time by over 10 minutes.
≥Programmes that failed to record are deleted from the timer recording
list at 4 a.m. two days later.
:
You stopped a daily or weekly timer recording. The icon
disappears the next time the timer recording starts
recording.
The disc was full. (not enough space)
:
:
The TV programme may not be recorded due to copy-
protect.
To deactivate timer programme
(e.g. to interrupt a daily or weekly timer
programming)
X:
Recording stopped (Dirty disc or video cassette, etc.)
Drive Recording drive is set to DVD or VHS
B Drive space (Except for [VHS] )
After performing step 1 (> left)
When the drive is set to VHS, “- -” is displayed.
OK:
Recordable
> (Date): For daily or weekly timer recordings, the display will
show until when recordings can be made (up to one
month ahead from the present time) based on the
time remaining on the disc.
2
(Red)
– “F” (> left) disappears from the timer
recording list.
– Press the “Red” button again to activate timer
programme.
!:
It may not be possible to record because:
– the disc is write-protected.
– there is no more space left.
– the number of possible titles has reached its
maximum.
– programmes are overlapped.
– the timer programme is deactivated.
Tips
You can deactivate the timer programme in the following
procedure as well.
C Channel name, programme name and other
information are displayed.
Perform step 1 (> left)
1
2
Press [OPTION]
Press [3, 4] to select “Timer Off”, then press [OK].
34
VQT2J51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Making timer recordings on the television
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
To make a timer recording with your television, connect to
a television with a Q Link function (> 46) that you can
use for setting timer recordings using a fully wired 21-pin
Scart cable (> 10,11).
Make timer programming on the TV.
1
2
to turn the unit off.
– The start and end of recording is controlled by TV.
Tips
To stop recording
Press [∫].
Notes
≥When this unit is in EXT LINK standby (“EXT-L” on the unit’s display
lights), recording from TV does not start.
≥Programmes are recorded as one title on this unit when the end time
of the earlier timer recording and the start time of the later timer
recording are close to each other.
[RAM] To divide the titles, go to “Divide Title” (> 51).
Notes on timer recording
≥When a timer recording is set, DVDs that were recorded using a
different TV system (PAL/NTSC) cannot be played unless the TV
system is changed in the Setup menu (> 70) or the timer recording
has completed or has been cancelled.
≥Timer recordings are activated regardless of whether the unit is turned
on/off.
≥Timer recordings begin when the set time is reached even when
playing.
≥Timer recordings do not begin while editing or copying.
≥If the unit is turned on when timer recording begins, it remains turned
on after recording finishes. It does not turn off automatically. You can
turn the unit off during timer recording.
≥When you programme successive timer recordings to start
immediately one after the other, the unit cannot record the part at the
beginning of the later programmes.
Programme Programme
Not recorded
Recorded
Recorded
≥
The “Overlapped Timer Recording” screen may be displayed immediately
after you turn on this unit, if new overlapping occurred. Refer to “Check,
Change, Delete Programmes, or Resolve Overlapping” (
>
34).
35
VQT2J51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GUIDE Plus+ system
What is the GUIDE Plus+ system?
The GUIDE Plus+ system gives you an overview of digital television and radio programmes up to 7 days in advance.
For many of these programmes, you can select additional information provided by the stations. You can search the
programme preview according to various topics such as sport, films etc., according to categories such as TV or
radio. Also, you can search for programmes using programme information such as programme names etc. You can
easily find the desired programmes and set Timer recording.
Logo of the Gemstar branding partner
Landscape view
The Gemstar branding
partner will supply the
rating information in the
programme information
and the recommended
group in the Prog.Type list.
Landscape view:
TV Guide:
RadioTimes
Landscape
All Types
All Channels
Tue 12th
10 Channel 4+1
Tue 12/10/10
19:45
Broadcast date
Advertisement
The GUIDE Plus+ system offers
detailed information as if you see a TV
programme magazine.
This is convenient to check the status of
Timer recording.
Channel 4 News
Time:
BBC 1
BBC 2
Hollyoaks
Channel 4
Channel 5
2
Channel 4 News
Timer icon
(> 23)
Portrait view:
This is convenient to narrow down
channels to search for the programme
you want to watch.
-24 hours
+24 hours
Prog.Type
Category
TIMER REC
RETURN
OPTION: Select Advert, etc
info
Page
Page
Guide Change Display Mode
I
To switch between Landscape view
and Portrait view
Press [GUIDE].
Selected
TV Guide: Portrait
RadioTimes
programme
All Types
ITV 4
All Channels
Tue 12th
Tue 12/10/10
19:45
10 Channel 4+1
Channel 4
More 4
E4
I
:
:
19 30 20 00 Hollyoaks
:
:
20 00 21 00 Channel 4 News
:
:
21 00 22 00 How to Look Good Naked
:
22 00 23:00 The Secret Millionaire
23:00
00:05 Love Trap
:
:
00 05 00 10 3 Minute Wonder
00:10 01:00 Trial and Error
-24 hours
+24 hours
OPTION: Select Advert, etc
info
Prog.Type
Category
TIMER REC
RETURN
Page
Page
Guide Change Display Mode
Portrait view
Using the GUIDE Plus+ list
View advertisement
Enter your postcode when using this function for the first time (> 73,
Post Code) and leave the unit in standby over night to capture the
information.
To change channels
Landscape view
Press [3, 4] to select a channel.
If you have already entered your postcode in Owner ID (> 13), you do
not have to enter again.
If you enter an incorrect postcode for your area, or no postcodes are
entered, advertisement may not be displayed correctly.
Portrait view
Press [2, 1] to select a channel.
The GUIDE Plus+ list appears for this
channel.
To display advertisement information
To view a programme list ≥Jump ahead 24 hours
1
2
§
Press [OPTION].§
for another day
Press the “Green” button to jump ahead
Press [3, 4] to select “Select Advert”, then press [OK].
by one day.
≥Jump back 24 hours
Press the “Red” button.
You can only jump back to the current
date. Past information cannot be
viewed.
While the advertisement information is not captured, “Enter Words”
screen is displayed. (> 37, Searching desired programmes on
GUIDE Plus+ list by words)
≥To display the latest advertisement, you will need to update the
information.
To change the page of
the GUIDE Plus+ list
Press [W X CH].
≥To update the information continuously, this unit must be left in
standby mode over night.
To see programme
information (programme
name, programme
duration, broadcast
time, description, etc.)
(Programmes with the
symbol)
Press [STATUS ].
≥Press [3] and [4] to scroll up and
down.
To show other pages
Press [CH W] (Previous) or [X CH]
(Next).
To return to the GUIDE Plus+ list
Press [STATUS ].
To change advertisements
Press [3, 4].
To return to TV Guide
Press [RETURN ].
Notes
≥Some advertisements are for future programmes and you can set the
timer recording of the programmes using the advertisement screen.
Follow the on-screen instructions.
To return to the previous
screen
Press [RETURN ].
Press [EXIT].
≥The information from the GUIDE Plus+ system will not be lost even if
the unit is turned off at the mains outlet.
To exit the screen
Tips
Notes
When the unit displays “No Data” or the empty GUIDE Plus+ list:
≥The receipt of the GUIDE Plus+ system data is only possible via the
aerial input of this unit. The receipt of the GUIDE Plus+ data via
externally connected digital satellite receivers is not possible.
≥The GUIDE Plus+ system setup will not work if the clock is not set
correctly or the wrong postcode is selected.
TV Guide:
Tue 12th
Landscape
All Types
All Channels
Tue 12/10/10
19:45
Time:
BBC 1
BBC 2
The “empty” field
Channel 4
Channel 5
2
≥Some digital broadcast may not send programme information.
Set the timer recording manually (> 33, Manual timer recordings).
36
VQT2J51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Searching desired programmes on GUIDE
Plus+ list by words
Selecting the programme from the desired
programme type or category
By entering words, you can search for programmes from
the GUIDE Plus+ list using the programme information.
This function lets you display a GUIDE Plus+ list sorted
by programme type (e.g. Movie, Sport) or category (e.g.
Free Channels, Radio).
1
I
1
I
– The GUIDE Plus+ list appears.
– The GUIDE Plus+ list appears.
OPTION
Select Advert
2
Free Word Search
2a
Category
Type
to display
the list of
programme type.
(Yellow)
All Types
All Channels
3, 4 to select “Free Word
3
All Types
Movie
News
Entertainment
Sport
Children’s
Education
Lifestyle
Drama
All Channels
Free Channels
Radio
Search”, then
OK
Data
Favourite 1
Favourite 2
Favourite 3
Favourite 4
Enter the word you would like to
4
2b
to display the
list of categories.
(Blue)
search for, then
STOP
Entry method > 49, Entering Text
3, 4 to select the desired item.
3
4
3, 4 to select “Simplified Search”
or “Detailed Search”, then
5
OK
OK
– A list appears with all programmes of the
selected item.
Simplified Search:
Free Word Search
It searches the
– When you select the landscape view, the
programmes that belong to the selected
programme type are highlighted.
e. g.,
Simplified Search
programme names
Detailed Search
only.
Detailed Search may result in
many hits, but
Detailed Search:
search time will be longer.
It searches all the
TV Guide:
Tue 12th
Landscape
Programme type,
“News” is selected
in step 3 of
News
All Channels
information on the
Tue 12/10/10
19:45
programmes. It might take more time to search the
desired programme.
Emmerdale : In today’s show we will...
Time:
BBC 1
BBC 2
Landscape view.
TV Guide: Portrait
Channel 4
Channel 5
2
Search results for “Dog”
Tue 12th
Tue 12/10/10
19:45
11 SKY THREE
SKY THRE
Premier R
Virgin Radi
Clyde 1
+24 hours
Prog.Type
Category
Thu 20th
:
:
19 30 20 00
The Dog Whispe...
SELECT
RETURN
OPTION: Select Advert, etc.
info
Page
Page
:
:
22 00 22 30
The Dog Whispe...
The Dog Whispe...
Fri 21st
Guide Change Display Mode
:
:
19 30 20 00
Search results appear.
3, 4, 2, 1 to select the
5
3, 4, 2, 1 to select the
6
programme.
programme.
After searching > right, Tips in “Searching desired
programmes on GUIDE Plus+ list by words”
After searching > below, Tips
Notes
Tips
≥The broadcasters allocate individual programmes to topic areas. This
function does not work properly unless the information which
distinguishes the programme type and categories sent from broadcast
stations is correct.
After searching
1 Press [OK].
2 If “Timer Recording” screen appears
Go to step 3 of “Timer Recording” (> 23)
≥The programme list is available immediately if this unit has found a
digital station and loaded the information in the memory. This process
can take a while depending on the particular station.
If “Selection Screen” appears
Press [3, 4] to select the item.
≥The programme list data are continuously downloaded in the
background when the unit is turned on. That means that the
programme list can sometimes change while you are looking at it.
≥“View” > 19, Watching Television
≥“Rec.” > 23, Timer Recording, step 3
≥“Delete” > Timer recordings can be cancelled.
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
–The timer icon disappears.
Tips
To return to the previous GUIDE Plus+ list before you have
selected the programme type or categories
To return to the previous screen
Select “All Types” of the programme type and “All Channels” of the
categories in step 3 (> above).
Press [RETURN ].
It may return to the GUIDE Plus+ screen.
To return to the previous screen
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
Press [RETURN ].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
37
VQT2J51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Disc Playback
Selecting Titles to Play
Search
You can easily select and play recorded programmes by
using DIRECT NAVIGATOR.
During playback
or
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
– There are 5 search speeds. Each press increases
the search speed. ([+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] up to 3 speeds)
– Press [1] (PLAY) to restart normal playback.
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
DVD-RAM
Title View
08
VIDEO
- -
PICTURE
1
07
BBC 1 10/10 FRI
- -
BBC 1 11/10 SAT
- -
Tips
- -
Depending on the disc, search may not be possible.
Previous
Page 02/02
Next
OK
Previous
Select
OPTION
Next
Skip
RETURN
[RAM]
When “VIDEO” is not
selected, press the “Red” button to select
“VIDEO”.
You can skip to the beginning (or the end) of Title/
Chapter. Skip is operated for each chapter.
During playback or while paused
– Each press increases the number of skips.
or
3, 4, 2, 1 to select the title you
2
want to watch, then
OK
Quick View (Play k 1.3)
Tips
[RAM]
To select the title with the numbered buttons
Allows you to increase the play speed slightly without
distorting the audio.
e.g.,
5: [0] > [5]
15: [1] > [5]
To view other pages
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next”, then press [OK].
– You can also press [:, 9] to view other pages.
PLAY
During playback
(Press and hold.)
To exit the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
– Press again to return to normal speed.
DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen icons
Protected.
Direct Play
Not recorded due to recording protection (Digital
broadcasts, etc.)
During playback, you can access specific titles or
scenes through direct entry of the numbered buttons.
t
It cannot be played because data is damaged, etc.
Currently recording.
μ
“One time only recording” restriction (> 92, CPRM)
≥MP3
e.g.,
5:
15:
≥Other discs
Input a 2-digit number
e.g.,
5:
15:
2 3
4 5 6
1
[0] > [0] > [0] > [5]
Title recorded using a different encoding system from
that of the TV System currently selected on the unit.
≥Alter the “TV System” setting on this unit to suit (> 70).
(NTSC)
(PAL)
[0] > [0] > [1] > [5]
8 9
7
[0] > [5]
[1] > [5]
0
SELECT
38
VQT2J51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Slow-motion Play
Manual Skip
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
[DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›] [VCD]
[RAM]
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] (This function does not
work with finalised discs.)
[+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
While paused
– There are 5 slow-motion speeds. Each press
increases the speed.
or
1-minute skip function:
Skips approx. 1 minute forward with each press.
– Press [1] (PLAY) to restart normal playback.
+60s
During playback
Notes
≥If continued for approx. 5 minutes, slow-motion play pauses
automatically (except [DVD-V] [VCD]).
≥[VCD] allow slow-motion in the forward direction only.
10-second skip back function:
Each time you press, play skips backward approximately
10 seconds.
Frame-by-Frame Viewing
-10s
During playback
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
[DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›] [VCD]
Create Chapters
While paused
OK
[RAM]
After creating chapters in your favourite scenes, you can
easily reach the head of scene using [:, 9] (SKIP)
or play on Chapter View. (> 52)
– Each press shows the next or previous frame.
– Press and hold to advance or reverse frame-by-
frame in succession.
– Press [1] (PLAY) to restart normal playback.
CHAPTER
During playback
Notes
≥[VCD] allow Frame-by-Frame in the forward direction only.
Tips
Time Slip
≥Chapters cannot be created during EXT LINK standby (> 31).
[RAM]
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] (This function does not
work with finalised discs.)
[+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
Use to skip in 1-minute or 10-minute increments.
TIME SLIP
During playback
1
3, 4 to select the time, then
2
OK
– Each time you press [3, 4], the time
increases [3] or decreases [4] by 1-minute
intervals.
– Press and hold for 10-minute intervals.
39
VQT2J51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Video Cassette Playback
Fast-forward/Rewind
VHS Index Search System (VISS)
The unit automatically records special index signals on a
tape every time a recording is started (via [¥ REC], or a
timer recording). The index search function makes use of
these index signals to help you find the beginning of a
desired programme quickly and easily.
While stopped
to fast-forward the tape.
to rewind the tape.
While stopped or during normal play
Slow-motion Play
or
During playback
– The unit automatically starts playback after the index
signal is found.
PAUSE
– Each press increases the number of skips.
– Press [∫] to cancel the search.
Press and hold for about 2 seconds.
– Press [1] (PLAY) to restart normal playback.
Notes
Notes
≥Up to 20 index signals can be searched in either direction.
≥If you overshoot in either direction, press the opposite button to
correct.
Slow-motion Play is automatically cancelled after 10 minutes.
≥For correct operation, make recordings of at least 5 minutes to ensure
that index signals are not spaced too closely together.
Cue/Review
You can quickly review a portion of the video just played
or cue to later portions of the tape.
S-VHS Quasi Playback (SQPB)
During playback
This unit can play tapes recorded in S-VHS.
≥ Some picture noise may occur depending on the type
of tape used.
≥ It is not possible to fully obtain the high resolution S-
VHS is capable of.
≥ This unit cannot record in S-VHS.
to cue to later portions of the tape.
to review a portion just played.
– Press [1] (PLAY) to restart normal playback.
Notes
Repeat Playback
Cue/review is automatically cancelled after 10 minutes.
Tips
When the tape reaches the end of the programme, it will
automatically rewind to the beginning of the tape and
play again.
For quicker operation
≥Hold [6, 5] to start cue/review and release the button to restart
normal playback.
During playback or while stopped
Jet Search
PLAY
Press and hold for about 5 or
You can high speed search a video in the forward or the
reverse direction.
more seconds.
During playback
– Repeat Playback goes on indefinitely until you cancel
it.
twice to Jet Search forward.
– The “R 1” indication appears on screen.
– Press [∫] to stop play.
twice to Jet Search in reverse.
– Press [1] (PLAY) to restart normal playback.
Notes
Only works if there is at least 5 seconds blank space at the end of the
programme.
Notes
≥
Depending on your TV, the picture may not be in colour or may be distorted.
≥Jet Search is automatically cancelled after 10 minutes.
Jet Rewind
Video tapes will rewind to the beginning of the tape at
higher-speed.
During playback or while stopped
JET REW
Notes
≥Depending on the tape or an operating condition, the rewind speed
may change somewhat.
≥The tape counter is reset to “0:00.00” when the tape is rewound to the
beginning.
≥Depending on the tape, this function may not work.
40
VQT2J51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjusting the Playback Picture
On-screen Display Indicators
STATUS
Manual Tracking
to display on-screen indicators.
The unit usually makes tracking adjustments
automatically, but you may need to do it manually if noise
appears on a tape recorded on other equipment.
LR SP
VHS
During playback
CH
CH
or
Press and hold until the picture noise
disappears.
0:00.22
To return to auto tracking:
1 VHS drive indicator
2 L and R indicators
CH
(simultaneously).
The Left (L) and Right (R) indicators show which sound mode is
selected as follows:
L R (Stereo): Hi-Fi stereo audio
L -:
Mono L audio of the Hi-Fi stereo audio
Mono R audio of the Hi-Fi stereo audio
Tips
- R:
- - (Normal): Normal audio
3 Recording mode (> 28)
To remove the noise from a paused picture:
Start slow-motion (> 40), then adjust the tracking.
4 Operation status
5 Shows the tape counter and remaining tape time
Notes
≥This function may not work with some tapes.
Pressing [STATUS
] to cycle the display as follows:
≥You can also adjust the tracking with [CH W X] on the main unit.
No display > Tape counter
^ Remaining tape time ꢀ
Vertical Locking Adjustment
≥Press [DELETE ¢] to reset the tape counter (elapsed time) to
“0:00.00”. The tape counter is automatically reset when inserting a
video cassette.
Adjust the vertical synchronisation to stop the picture
from shaking while paused.
Notes
Remaining tape time display
≥The displayed time is approximate.
While paused
≥The displayed time will be incorrect if you set the wrong tape length in
“Tape Length” in the Setup menu (> 71) and if the tape is of poor
quality.
CH
CH
or
Press and hold until the shaking stops.
To return to the standard position:
CH
(simultaneously).
Notes
≥This function may not work with some tapes.
≥You can also adjust vertical synchronisation with [CH W X] on the
main unit.
Changing Audio during Playback
STTL
Press and hold for about 5 or
more seconds.
The audio changes as follows.
L R (Stereo) -------------------> L -----------------> R
^ No display (Normal audio track) ꢀ
41
VQT2J51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing Music files and Still Pictures (JPEG)
Showing the menu screen
Playing music files
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD]
You can play MP3 files recorded with a computer onto a
DVD-R, DVD-R DL, CD-R/CD-RW and USB memory.
(> 18)
Insert the disc.
1
≥ You cannot play MP3 files on the USB memory while
recording or copying.
If the menu screen appears
2
3, 4 to select the item, then
OK
Show MP3 Menu screen.
1
Playback
e.g., [CD]
(> left, Showing the menu screen)
Play Mode
Select file type.
JPEG
:
JPEG
Selected group A:Group No.
B:Track No. in the
MP3
No.
Group
My favorite
MP3 Menu
CD
G
group
1
Total
1
2
3
4
5
6
:
1
1
Track
Tree
C:Track No./Total
tracks in all groups
T
001 Both Ends Freezing
TOTAL
002 Lady Starfish
003 Life on Jupiter
004 Metal Glue
005 Paint ItYellow
006 Pyjamamama
1/111
[USB]
1
2
Number
0
–
9
Insert the USB memory.
2
OK
3, 4 to select a track, then
to play.
3, 4 to select a file type, then
OK
Tips
USB device
≥“
” indicates the track currently playing.
Picture ( JPEG )
Music ( MP3 )
To stop playing
Press [∫].
To exit the menu screens
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
If the menu screen appears
3
3, 4 to select the item, then
OK
To view other pages
Press [:, 9].
USB device
To select the track with the numbered buttons
e.g.,
5:
15:
[0] > [0] > [0] > [5]
[0] > [0] > [1] > [5]
View Pictures ( JPEG )
Start Slideshow
Copy Selected Pictures ( JPEG )
Notes
When the Power off link (> 46) function is activated, this unit will
automatically be set to Standby mode and the music will stop as you set
the TV to Standby mode.
Showing the menu with FUNCTION MENU Display
e.g. selecting a file to play
1 Press [RETURN ] several times to exit the menu.
2 Press [FUNCTION MENU].
Using the Tree Screen to Find a Group
FUNCTION MENU
CD(JPEG)
From the track list
1 while a track is highlighted to
1
Picture
Music
Playback
Recording
display the tree screen.
Copy
TV Guide
Others
Drive Select
OK
MP3 Menu
Tree
RETURN
CD
MP3 music
G
8
G
7/25
T
14
001 My favorite
3 [-R] [-R]DL] [CD]
001 Brazilian pops
002 Chinese pops
003 Czech pops
TOTAL
40/111
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Playback”, then press [OK].
2 Press [3, 4] to select the file type, then press [OK].
[USB]
004 Hungarian pops
005 Liner notes
006 Japanese pops
007 Mexican pops
008 Philippine pops
Number
0
–
9
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Drive Select”, then press [OK].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “USB”, then press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select the file type, then press [OK].
4 If you select “Picture (JPEG)” in the step 3 above,
press [3, 4] to select “View Pictures ( JPEG )”, then
press [OK].
A:Selected Group No./Total Group No.
If the group has no compatible track, “--” is
displayed as the group number.
B:You cannot select a group that contains no
compatible track.
3, 4 to select a group, then
2
OK
– The track list for the selected group appears.
Tips
To return to the track list
Press [RETURN ].
42
VQT2J51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing still pictures
Start Slideshow
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]
For more information on still picture files that can be
played on this unit (> 18)
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]
You can display still pictures one by one with regular
interval with favourite music.
While the Album View screen is displayed
3, 4, 2, 1 to select an album.
Show Album View screen.
1
1
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]
(> 42, Showing the menu screen)
[RAM]
While stopped
1 Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the drive.
2 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
When “PICTURE” is not selected, press the
“Green” button to select “PICTURE”.
2
PLAY
You can also start Slideshow with the
following steps.
1From the Album View screen
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the desired
album, then press [OPTION].
2Press [3, 4] to select “Start Slideshow”, then
press [OK].
Album View
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Album View
DVD-RAM
VIDEO
- - -
PICTURE
screen
001
002
Regarding
Album View
screen
12/10/10
104_DVD
Total
4
12/10/10
108_DVD
Total 24
- - -
- - -
- - -
(> below)
Page 01/01
OPTION
Previous
Next
OK
Tips
Slideshow
Select All
RETURN
To select multiple albums for starting Slideshow:
1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the album.
2 Press [;].
3, 4, 2, 1 to select the album,
2
A check mark appears.
then
OK
≥Press [;] again to cancel the selection.
3 Repeat steps 1-2 until you select all necessary albums.
4 Perform step 2.
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Picture (JPEG) View
DVD-RAM
e.g., DVD-RAM
PICTURE
To select all albums for starting Slideshow:
1 Press [∫] in step 1.
2 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes”, then press [OK].
3 Perform step 2.
Album Name 103__DVD
0001
0005
0009
0002
0006
----
0003
0007
----
0004
0008
----
[USB]
Page 001/001
Previous
Next
OK
To start Slideshow on the menu screen:
Slideshow
OPTION
RETURN
1 Insert the USB memory.
The menu is automatically displayed. (> 42)
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Start Slideshow”, then press [OK].
3, 4, 2, 1 to select the still
3
picture, then
OK
Slideshow Settings
While the Album View screen is displayed
OPTION
Notes
1
≥Still pictures cannot be played during recording or copying.
Tips
DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen icons
Picture and folder protected
3, 4 to select “Slideshow
2
To stop viewing a picture
Press [∫].
Settings”, then
OK
To return to the Album View screen or Picture (JPEG) View screen
Press [RETURN ].
3, 4 to select “Picture Settings” or
“Background Music Settings”, then
To exit the menu screens
3
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
To view other pages
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next”, then press [OK].
– You can also press [:, 9] to view other pages.
OK
To select the still picture or album with the numbered buttons
Album
Still picture
3, 4 to select the item, then
2, 1 to select the setting (> 44).
4
e.g., 5:
[0] > [0] > [5]
[0] > [1] > [5]
e.g., 5:
15:
[0] > [0] > [0] > [5]
[0] > [0] > [1] > [5]
15:
115: [1] > [1] > [5]
115: [0] > [1] > [1] > [5]
1115: [1] > [1] > [1] > [5]
After finishing settings
3, 4, 2, 1 to select “Set”, then
5
Regarding Album View screen
OK
002
12/10/10
Total 24
Zoological park
Shooting date/Number of pictures/Album name
≥Depending on the digital camera, the editing software on the PC etc.,
the information about the recording date may not be displayed. In this
case, the date will appear as [--/--/--].
43
VQT2J51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing Music files and Still Pictures (JPEG)
Picture Settings
Zoom
Picture Settings
Please set the following functions.
Display Interval
Repeat Play
Random
Normal
On
While playing a picture
OPTION
1
2
Off
Set
Cancel
SELECT
RETURN
To zoom in:
3, 4 to select “Zoom
Display Interval:
Selects the desired interval. (“Normal”, “Long” or
“Short”)
The display interval may vary depending on the
picture data size.
Selects “On” to play pictures in the selected album
repeatedly.
Selects “On” to play pictures in the selected album
at random.
Rotate RIGHT
Rotate LEFT
in”, then
Zoom in
OK
OK
Repeat Play:
Random:
RETURN
Tips
Background Music Settings
To return to the picture to its original size
Background Music Settings
Press [3, 4] to select “Zoom out” in step 2, then press [OK].
Please set the following functions.
Background Music
Random
On
Off
Notes
≥When zooming in, the still picture may be cut off.
≥“Zoom in” information is not stored.
≥“Zoom in” and “Zoom out” do not work with images that have a
resolution larger than 640k480 pixels.
Music Selection
No Selection
Set
Cancel
SELECT
RETURN
≥“Zoom in” and “Zoom out” do not work during Slideshow.
Background Music: Selects “On” to play Slideshow with Background
Music.
Picture Properties
Selects “Off“ to play Slideshow without Background
Music.
Selects “On” to play Background Music at random.
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Music Selection”, then
press [OK].
2 Press [3, 4] to select the storage location of
Background Music, then press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select an album for Background
Music, then press [OK].
Picture information is shown (e.g., shooting date).
Random:
Music Selection:
While playing a picture
STATUS
twice to display picture properties.
e.g., DVD-RAM
Notes
18:53:50 11/10
Folder - Picture No. 103 - 0006
≥Music albums on the same media cannot be used as the Background
Music. (Even if a music album on the same media is selected, the
music is not played.)
Date
1/ 1/ 2010
No.
3 / 9
≥DTS-CD cannot be played back as Slideshow Background Music.
Shooting Date
≥Depending on the camera
or editing software;
shooting dates may not be
displayed correctly.
Rotate Pictures
While playing a picture
OPTION
1
Or
Rotate RIGHT
From the Picture (JPEG) View screen
3, 4 to select “Rotate
RIGHT” or “Rotate
2
1
Rotate LEFT
3, 4, 2, 1 to select the picture,
OK
RETURN
OPTION
then
LEFT”, then
OK
3, 4 to select “Properties”, then
2
Tips
To return to the picture to its original position
OK
Press [3, 4] to select the opposite rotation in step 2, then press [OK].
Notes
Information (e.g., image size and file size) is
shown.
– To exit the Properties screen, press [OK].
≥Rotation information will not be stored.
– [-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB] Still pictures
– When disc or album is protected
– When played on other equipment
– When copying pictures
– Rotate RIGHT/Rotate LEFT does not work during Slideshow.
44
VQT2J51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Convenient Functions
Others
FUNCTION MENU Display
Select and execute a function other than those above,
such as Flexible Recording or setting.
By using the FUNCTION MENU you may access the
main functions quickly and easily.
≥ If “FUNCTION MENU Display” is set to “On” in the
Setup menu, FUNCTION MENU automatically appears
when you turn the power on. (> 69)
≥ Playlists (> 53)
≥ Flexible Rec (> 30)
≥ DVD Management (> 64)≥ Setup (> 66)
Drive Select
Change which drive is used.
With the unit stopped
≥ DVD
≥ VHS
≥ USB
1
Tips
To exit the FUNCTION MENU
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
3, 4 to select a function, then
2
OK
3, 4 to select an item, then
3
OK
Select
a function
and an item.
FUNCTION MENU
DVD-RAM
Disc Protection Off
Playback
Recording
Delete
Video
Picture
You can access
selected function
easily.
Copy
TV Guide
Others
Drive Select
OK
DELETE Navigator
DVD-RAM
Title View
08
RETURN
07
BBC 1 10/10 FRI
BBC 1 11/10 SAT
Previous
Next
Page 02/02
OK
Select Previous
OPTION
Next
RETURN
Playback
Select when you wish to playback the contents. The
DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen or menu screen etc. will
be displayed.
≥ Video (> 20)
≥ Picture (> 43)
≥ Top Menu (> 20)
≥ Music (> 42)
≥ Menu (> 20)
Recording
Select when you wish to perform manual timer
recording, or check the timer recording. The timer
recording list will be displayed. (> 33, 34)
Delete
Select the title or file type you wish to delete. The
DELETE Navigator screen will be displayed.
≥ Video (> 26) ≥ Picture (> 56)
Copy
Select when you wish to copy in the way other than One
Touch Copy. (> 24)
≥
Advanced Copy (
>
57)
TV Guide
Select when you wish to watch or record a programme.
The TV Guide will be displayed. (> 19, 23)
45
VQT2J51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Linked Operations with the TV (VIERA Link “HDAVI ControlTM”/Q Link)
You can enjoy linked operations with the TV and receiver
by using “VIERA Link” or Q Link.
(When the TV is on) Easy playback
[VIERA]Link] [Q]Link]
What is VIERA Link “HDAVI Control”? [VIERA]Link]
When the TV is on and the following operations are
performed, the TV’s input will automatically switch to
HDMI input mode ([VIERA]Link]) or AV input mode
([Q]Link]) and the TV displays the corresponding action.
(Picture or sound may not be available for the first few
seconds.)
VIERA Link “HDAVI Control” is a convenient function that offers
linked operations of this unit, and a Panasonic TV (VIERA) or
receiver under “HDAVI Control”. You can use this function by
connecting the equipment with the HDMI cable. See the
operating instructions for connected equipment for operational
details.
≥VIERA Link “HDAVI Control”, based on the control functions
provided by HDMI which is an industry standard known as HDMI
CEC (Consumer Electronics Control), is a unique function that we
have developed and added. As such, its operation with other
manufacturers’ equipment that supports HDMI CEC cannot be
guaranteed.
≥This unit supports “HDAVI Control 5” function.
≥“HDAVI Control 5” is the newest standard (current as of December,
2009) for Panasonic’s HDAVI Control compatible equipment.
≥This standard is compatible with Panasonic’s conventional HDAVI
equipment.
≥Please refer to individual manuals for other manufacturers’
equipment supporting VIERA Link function.
Press [FUNCTION MENU]§1, [1] (PLAY)§2,
[DIRECT NAVIGATOR], [GUIDE], [PROG/CHECK]
etc.
(When the TV is off) Power on link
[VIERA]Link] [Q]Link]
When the TV is off and the following operations are
performed, the TV will automatically turn on and
displays the corresponding action.
(Picture or sound may not be available for the first few
seconds.)
Press [FUNCTION MENU]§1, [1] (PLAY)§2,
[DIRECT NAVIGATOR], [GUIDE], [PROG/CHECK]
Preparation:
1
Connect this unit to your TV using an HDMI cable and a fully wired
21-pin Scart cable, or to your receiver using an HDMI cable (> 12,
77).
etc.
≥[DVD-V] [CD] [VCD] [VHS] SVCD and MP3
The TV is automatically turned on when you insert the discs or
VHS.
2
3
Set “VIERA Link” to “On” (> 70). (The default setting is “On”.)
Set the “HDAVI Control” operations on the connected equipment
(e.g., TV).
≥Set the input channel on VIERA to suit the terminal to be
used as “HDAVI Control”.
Power off link [VIERA]Link] [Q]Link]
4
Turn on all “HDAVI Control” compatible equipment and select this
unit’s input channel on the connected TV so that the “HDAVI
Control” function works properly.
Also when the connection or settings are changed, repeat
this procedure.
When you set the TV to standby mode, the unit is also
automatically set to standby mode. The unit is
automatically set to standby mode even if the
FUNCTION MENU etc. is displayed, during playback or
when the unit is set to a timer recording.
Even if the TV is turned off, the unit will not be turned
off at the same time when recording, copying, finalising
What is Q Link? [Q]Link]
etc.
Q Link is a convenient function that offers linked operations of this
unit and a Panasonic TV. You can use this function by connecting the
equipment with a fully wired 21-pin Scart cable.
≥When this unit is connected to an “HDAVI Control” compatible
Panasonic receiver with an HDMI cable, the receiver will also turn
off.
Preparation:
Direct TV Recording [VIERA]Link] §3 [Q]Link]
≥ Connect this unit to your TV with a fully wired 21-pin Scart cable
(> 10, 11).
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
This function allows you to immediately start recording
the programme that you are viewing on the TV.
≥Depending on the TV type connected with this unit, this function
may not work.
Notes
The following systems from other manufacturers have similar function
to Q Link from Panasonic.
For details, refer to your television’s operating instructions or consult
your dealer.
≥Q Link (registered trademark of Panasonic)
≥DATA LOGIC (registered trademark of Metz)
≥Easy Link (registered trademark of Philips)
≥Megalogic (registered trademark of Grundig)
≥SMARTLINK (registered trademark of Sony)
Press and hold [¥ DIRECT TV REC] for 1 second.
Recording starts.
To stop recording
Press [∫].
≥If you switch TV channels while using Direct TV Recording, the
Direct TV Recording stops.
≥When “EXT-L” lights on the unit’s display (> 31), Direct TV
Recording is unavailable.
§1
This button is available only when this unit is on.
When this button is pressed, the playback image is not immediately
displayed on the screen and it may not be possible to watch the
contents from where playback started.
§2
Notes
≥These functions may not work normally depending on the equipment
condition.
≥About “HDAVI Control” function, read the manual of the connected
equipment (e.g., TV) too.
In this case, press [:] or [6] to go back to where playback
started.
§3
This function is available with the TV that supports “HDAVI Control
3” or later.
46
VQT2J51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Control Panel
Easy control only with VIERA remote
control
If you connect this unit to the TV that supports “HDAVI Control
2” or later with an HDMI cable, you can enjoy using more
convenient functions.
You can operate this unit using buttons on the TV remote
control.
The buttons that you can use for this unit vary depending on the
TV. For details, refer to the operating instructions of the TV.
Use the remote control supplied with this unit if you cannot
operate this unit using buttons on the TV remote control.
Using the “Control Panel”, you can operate search backward,
search forward, stop, etc, with the TV remote control.
Select “Control Panel”, then press [OK] in step 2 of “Using the
OPTION menu window to operate this unit” (> left).
The Control Panel is displayed (> right)
Control Panel
≥ While playing a title or DVD-Video, etc.
– [3]: Pause, [4]: Stop,
[2]: Search backward,
[1]: Search forward, [OK]: Play,
[EXIT]: Exit the Control Panel
≥ While playing still pictures
– [4]: Stop, [2]:View previous picture,
Pause
Exit
Search
Search
Play
Stop
≥ The operation of this unit may be interrupted when you press
incompatible buttons on the TV remote control.
≥ The TV displays the TV tuner’s picture when the linked
operation is finished.
[1]: View next picture, [EXIT]: Exit the Control Panel
∫ When you want to leave the TV on and set only this unit
to standby mode
Using the FUNCTION MENU to operate this unit
[VIERA]Link]
Press [Í] on this unit’s remote control, then set to standby
mode.
∫ When not using “HDAVI Control”
Set “VIERA Link” in the Setup menu to “Off” (> 70).
This function is available with the TV that supports “HDAVI
Control 2” or later.
1 Display this unit’s “FUNCTION MENU” using the TV
remote control.
≥If this unit is turned off, this unit will turn on automatically.
≥About the FUNCTION MENU Display (> 45, 69)
2 Select the item you want to operate with the TV remote
control, then press [OK].
Using the OPTION menu window to operate this unit
[VIERA]Link]
This function is available with the TV that supports “HDAVI
Control 2” or later.
By using the TV remote control, you can play discs using the
“Control Panel” (> right) and display the Top Menu for DVD-
Video.
1 Display this unit’s “FUNCTION MENU” using the TV
remote control. (> above)
2 Press [OPTION].
Control Panel
≥You cannot use the OPTION menu while the Top
FUNCTION MENU
Menu for DVD-Video is displayed or while DVD-
Video is being copied.
Top Menu
Menu
3 Select an item, then press [OK].
OK
RETURN
Switch to TV
Displayed when watching with the
tuner of this unit. It will return to the
TV picture.
Control Panel
Control Panel is displayed. (> right)
FUNCTION MENU
FUNCTION MENU is displayed.
(> above)
Top Menu [DVD-V]
Menu [DVD-V]
Top Menu is displayed. (> 20)
Menu is displayed. (> 20)
Standby Settings
“Standby Settings” screen is
displayed (> 72).
Slideshow
“Album View” screen is displayed
(> 43).
Rotate RIGHT/Rotate Rotate the still pictures. (> 44)
LEFT (JPEG)
Zoom in/Zoom out
(JPEG)
Enlarge or shrink the still picture.
(> 44)
Audio Description
Audio Description screen is
displayed. (> 48)
47
VQT2J51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Information Messages
Listening to the Audio Description
Digital Channel Information
This function can aid visually-impaired viewers by adding an
audio track to describe events on-screen.
You can display the information about programmes
(programme name, broadcast time, etc.).
When “AD” appears in digital channel information
1
With the unit stopped
STATUS
OPTION
to show the OPTION menu.
to show the screen information.
3, 4 to select “Audio Description”,
2
When the digital channel information is being displayed
– Press [STATUS ] again and detailed information
will be displayed (only when “info ” is displayed).
then
OK
– Audio Description screen appears.
DVD-RAM
1: 07 SP
1 DVB
Status message (> 49)
3, 4 to select “Audio Description”.
3
BBC ONE Wales
“info
”
RETURN
4
2, 1 to select “Auto”, then
STATUS
1 BBC ONE Wales
Wales today
17:00 – 17:15
All Channels
Change Category
17:11
NOW
Multi Audio
info
Subtitle
Notes
TXT
≥Programmes are recorded with Audio Description when you record
them with “Audio Description” set to “Auto”.
STATUS
1 BBC ONE Wales
Wales today
17:00 - 17:15
In the 1970’s, John Belshi, working with National Lampoon, mol with Dan
Aykuoyd, then a host of a children’s tv program, and owner of
speakeasy called the “505 Club”. Dan from Toronto, put on a record
called Straight Up. by the Downchild Blues Band.
All Channels
17:11
Tips
NOW
Exit info
≥To turn off the Audio Description
a
Detailed
In the step 4 (> above), press [2, 1] to select “Off”, then press
[RETURN ].
≥To change the volume
Digital channel
information
Subtitle information
Multi Audio
TXT
In the step 3 (> above), press [3, 4] to select “Volume” and press
[2, 1] to set the volume, then press [RETURN ].
≥You can switch the Audio Description and change its volume during
recording and timer recording.
Category (Favourite > 66)
Channel and Station Name
Signal Quality (> 49)
1 BBC ONE Wales
No Signal
All Channels
19:03
Showing the Digital Teletext
BBC News
Change Category
Programme name
and Broadcast time
19:00 - 19:30
info
NOW
AD Multi Audio
When “TXT” appears in digital channel information
Encrypted
TXT
Subtitle
TEXT
to show the Digital Teletext.
During scrambled broadcasting (You cannot watch
the broadcast).
– Press again to hide.
Audio Description service may be available.
Notes
Programme is broadcast in multi-channel sound
(> 63, DVB Multi Audio).
To select audio language
≥During recording the Digital Teletext function is not possible.
≥When subtitle is on or the digital channel information is displayed, the
Digital Teletext function does not work.
(> 67, DVB Preferred Multi Audio)
Tips
Digital Teletext may be available.
To view another page of Digital Teletext
Press [3, 4] to select another page and press [OK].
≥You can also use the numbered buttons to select another page.
Subtitle may be available.
Even with programmes with “AD”, “Multi
e.g.,
Quickly access to certain topic areas and navigation
Use colour buttons according to on-screen instructions.
Audio”, “TXT” and “Subtitle” indications,
you may not be able to use these
services. To confirm the availability of
these services, refer to the indications in
the detailed information too.§
1 BBC ONE Wales
All Channels
17:11
Wales today
17:00 - 17:15
NOW
Exit info
[AD,S]
Showing Subtitles
AD
Subtitle
§
When “Subtitle” appears in digital channel information
These indications are not displayed properly unless the
information sent from broadcast stations is correct.
STTL
to show subtitles.
Tips
To switch information of the current programme and the next
programme
Press [2, 1].
– Press again to hide.
Notes
≥NOW: current programme
≥NEXT: next programme
≥Programmes are recorded with subtitles when you record them with
the subtitles setting set to “Subtitles On”.
To select the information of another channel
Press [3, 4].
≥Press [OK] to watch the selected channel.
≥You cannot switch subtitles during timer recording.
Tips
To select subtitle language (> 67, DVB Preferred Subtitles)
To change the length of time digital channel information is
displayed for
(> 69, On-Screen Messages)
Notes
≥Every time you change the channel, digital channel information
appears automatically. They disappear again after a short time.
≥If you record a digital radio broadcast or a digital broadcast that is not
being received correctly, digital channel information is also recorded
and will remain visible during playback.
48
VQT2J51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entering Text
Changing the Category
You can give names to recorded titles, etc.
Also, you can search for desired programmes on
GUIDE Plus+ list by entering key words or the
programme name. (> 37, Free Word Search)
You can select one of your favourite channels by changing
the category [such as Free Channels, Radio and Registered
Favourites (> 66)].
When digital channel information is displayed
When viewing the “Enter Title Name” screen etc.
Enter Title Name
1
to change the category.
_
e.g., “Enter Title
Name” screen
(Blue)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
1
A
D
G
J
2
B
E
H
K
N
Q
U
X
,
3
C
F
I
4
5
a
6
b
e
7
c
f
8
/
9
$
0
Top Menu Preview
d
g
j
%
&
Signal Quality
h
k
i
Delete
L
O
R
V
Y
?
l
@
_
m
n
o
[
]
(
M
P
T
Add to List
Name List
S
p
t
q
u
x
'
r
s
{
)
-
No Signal:
The digital broadcast signal is not
being received.
v
}
W
.
Z
!
w
"
y
:
z
;
|
\
Set
A
`
No Service: No broadcasts are currently available.
SELECT
Space
RETURN
OK
Notes
≥If “No Signal” is displayed, check that the current digital broadcast
3, 4, 2, 1 to select a
channel is correctly broadcasting.
character, then
OK
Status Messages
– Repeat this step to enter other characters.
The following messages and displays appear to let you
know what operations are being performed and the
status of the unit.
Using the numbered buttons to enter characters
e.g.: entering the letter “R”
1
2
3
Press [7] to move to the 7th row.
Press [7] twice to highlight “R”.
Press [OK].
During playback and/or recording
To enter a space
Press [DELETE ¢], then press [OK].
STATUS
Several times to cycle through
available displays.
To delete a character
Press [;] on a character in the name field.
DVD-RAM
REC
Current media
To cancel in the middle
Shows current recording or play status.
Press [RETURN ].
≥Characters will not be saved.
1 DVB
Channel information
BBC ONE Wales
Recording drive/Copy progress indicator
VHS REC
when you’ve finished
entering text.
2
STOP
Remaining recording time and recording mode
(e.g.: “13:50 XP” indicates 13 hours and 50 minutes
in XP mode)
• Disc remaining time may slightly differ between
different models.
Tips
∫ To add a name to the list
You can add frequently used names and recall them later.
Maximum number of added names: 20
Maximum number of characters per name: 44
After entering the name (step 1)
1. Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Add to List”, then press
[OK].
The current date and time
DVD-RAM
REC
Remain
18:53:50 11/10
13:50 XP
T1 0:05.14 XP T2 0:00.10 XP
1 DVB
BBC ONE Wales
≥You can also press [9] to select “Add to List”.
2. Press [2, 1] to select “Add”, then press [OK].
VHS REC
Elapsed play time
and recording mode
Elapsed recording
time and recording mode
≥Press [RETURN ] to cancel.
No Display
∫ To recall an added name
1. Press [
3
,
4
,
2
,
1] to select “Name List”, then press [OK].
≥You can also press [:] to select “Name List”.
2. Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the name to be recalled,
then press [OK].
∫ To delete an added name
1. Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Name List”, then press
[OK].
≥You can also press [:] to select “Name List”.
2. Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the name to be deleted.
3. Press [OPTION] to show “Delete Name”, then press [OK].
4. Press [2, 1] to select “Delete”, then press [OK].
New Channel Message
When a new DVB channel is added this unit will be
informed automatically. Then the confirmation
message appears. If you select “Yes” on the display,
Auto-Setup starts (All channel settings and Favourites
are deleted and the timer recording programmes are
also cancelled.).
New Channel
5. Press [RETURN ].
A new DVB Channel has been found.
Start DVB Auto Setup?
Selecting DVB Auto Setup will delete
all Timer Programmes.
Notes
≥The number of characters that can be entered depends on what
kind of things you name.
Yes
No
≥If you enter a long name, only part of it is
shown in the Top Menu after finalisation
(> 65). When entering a title name, the
name that will appear in the Top Menu can
be previewed in “Top Menu Preview”
window.
RETURN
OK
Enter Title Name
Chapter 1_
_
1
2
3
4
5
1
A
D
G
J
Tips
Top Menu Preview
Chapter 1
The display/hide setting can be changed (> 69).
Delete
49
VQT2J51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanc
ed
Editing
Titles—Editing
[RAM]
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] (You can not edit finalised discs.)
[+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
Title Operations
You can edit titles on the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen:
deleting unwanted parts of titles such as commercials, changing
Thumbnail, dividing and deleting titles, etc.
Delete
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
Use to delete unneeded titles.
Important: Once deleted, contents cannot be recovered.
Tips
≥ Maximum numbers of titles on a disc
Perform steps 1 – 4 of “Accessing the Title View” (> left).
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
5 Press [3, 4] to select “Delete”, then press [OK].
6 Press [2] to select “Delete”, then press [OK] to
confirm.
99
49
Accessing the Title View
Notes
≥ [RAM] Deleting an item increases the available disc space
by the amount of space taken by the item deleted.
≥ [-R] [-R]DL] [+R] [+R]DL] Available disc space does not
increase after deletion.
Preparation:
≥ [RAM] Release protection (> 64, Setting Protection).
≥ [-RW‹V›] [+RW] Available disc space increases when you
delete the last title (the recording space may increase
slightly when other titles are deleted).
≥ Available disc space may not increase after deleting a short
title.
≥ [RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+RW] To recover total disc space, the disc
needs to be formatted. (> 64)
1 Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the drive.
2 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
[RAM] When “VIDEO” is not selected, press the “Red”
button to select “VIDEO”.
3 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a title.
– Multiple editing (> below, Tips)
4 Press [OPTION] to display the menu list.
≥ Items that cannot be selected are grey.
Properties
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
To view title information (e.g., date, time)
Perform steps 1 – 4 of “Accessing the Title View” (> left).
5 Press [3, 4] to select “Properties”, then press [OK].
EnterTitle Name
Set up Protection
Cancel Protection
Partial Delete
Change Thumbnail
Divide Title
Delete
Properties
Edit
Properties
Refer to “Title
Operations”
(> right)
Football
Delete
Properties
Edit
No.
01
Timeꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ18:07
Rec timeꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ2:15 SP
(
)
Date
12/10/2010 TUE
T5
Channel
Chapter View
PICTURE
Chapter View
OK
RETURN
PICTURE
If you select “Chapter View” (> 52)
Enter Title Name
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
You can give a name for the title.
Notes
≥ You cannot edit during recording or copying, etc.
≥ [+R] [+R]DL] Management information is recorded in unused
sections when you edit discs. The available space on these
discs decreases each time you edit their contents.
Perform steps 1 – 4 of “Accessing the Title View” (> left).
5 Press [3, 4] to select “Edit”, then press [OK].
6 Press [3, 4] to select “Enter Title Name”, then press
[OK].
Entering Text (> 49)
Tips
To exit the menu screens
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
To view other pages
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next”, then press
[OK].
– You can also press [:, 9] to view other pages.
Multiple editing
(Only Delete, Set up Protection, Cancel Protection)
Select with [3, 4, 2, 1], then press [;]. (Repeat.)
– A check mark appears. Press [;] again to cancel.
50
VQT2J51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Set up Protection/Cancel Protection
Change Thumbnail
[RAM] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
Use to prevent accidental erasure of titles.
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
Changes the thumbnail picture shown in the Title View screen.
Perform steps 1 – 4 of “Accessing the Title View” (> 50).
5 Press [3, 4] to select “Edit”, then press [OK].
6 Press [3, 4] to select “Set up Protection” or “Cancel
Protection”, then press [OK].
Perform steps 1 – 4 of “Accessing the Title View” (> 50).
5 Press [3, 4] to select “Edit”, then press [OK].
6 Press [3, 4] to select “Change Thumbnail”, then
press [OK].
7 Press [2] to select “Yes”, then press [OK].
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Change Thumbnail
DVD-RAM
VIDEO
Enter Title Name
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Title Vie
DVD-RAM
08
Set up Protection
Cancel Protection
Partial Delete
Change
Finish
07
08
The lock symbol appears
when the title is protected.
0:00.01
BBC 0 27/10 MON
- -
BBC 0 27/10
- -
Change Thumbnail
Divide Title
Start play and select the image
of a thumbnail.
Change
- -:- -.- -
OK
RETURN
Partial Delete
[RAM]
7 Press [1] (PLAY) to start play.
8 Press [OK] at the point you want to use as the
Use to remove unwanted parts of titles, such as commercials.
Important: Once deleted, the parts cannot be recovered.
thumbnail.
– For quicker editing (> below, Tips)
– To change the thumbnail:
Perform steps 1 – 4 of “Accessing the Title View” (> 50).
5 Press [3, 4] to select “Edit”, then press [OK].
6 Press [3, 4] to select “Partial Delete”, then press
[OK].
Restart play and press [3, 4] to select “Change”, then
press [OK] at the point you want to use as the
thumbnail.
9 Press [3, 4] to select “Finish”, then press [OK].
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Partial Delete
VIDEO
Divide Title
DVD-RAM
Enter Title Name
08
PLAY
Start
End
Set up Protection
Cancel Protection
Partial Delete
[RAM]
Next
Finish
You can divide a title into two.
Once divided, titles cannot be recombined.
0:43.21
Change Thumbnail
Divide Title
Start
End
- -:- -.- -
- -:- -.- -
Perform steps 1 – 4 of “Accessing the Title View” (> 50).
5 Press [3, 4] to select “Edit”, then press [OK].
6 Press [3, 4] to select “Divide Title”, then press [OK].
OK
RETURN
7 Press [OK] to set the “Start” point and then press
[OK] again to set the “End” point of the section you
want to erase.
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Divide Title
VIDEO
DVD-RAM
Enter Title Name
08
PLAY
Set up Protection
Cancel Protection
Partial Delete
Preview
Divide
– For quicker editing (> below, Tips)
– To delete multiple sections:
Finish
Press [3, 4] to select “Next”, and repeat this step.
8 Press [3, 4] to select “Finish”, then press [OK].
9 Press [2] to select “Delete”, then press [OK] to
confirm.
0:00.00
Change Thumbnail
Divide Title
Divide
- -:- -.- -
OK
RETURN
7 Press [OK] at the point you want to divide.
– For quicker editing (> below, Tips)
Notes
– Selecting “Preview”, then pressing [OK] plays the title
from 10 seconds prior, to 10 seconds after the division
point.
≥ You may not be able to specify start and end points within
3 seconds of each other.
≥ Available disc space may not increase after erasing short
parts of titles.
– To change the point to divide at:
Press [3, 4] to select “Divide”, then press [1] (PLAY)
to bring to the point where you want to divide, then
press [OK].
8 Press [3, 4] to select “Finish”, then press [OK].
9 Press [2] to select “Divide”, then press [OK].
– The title is divided at that point.
Notes
≥ Divided titles retain the name of the original.
≥ A short amount of video and audio just before and after the
division point get cut out.
≥ You cannot divide a title when the resulting parts are too
short or total number of titles exceeds 99.
Tips
For quicker editing
≥ Use Search (> 38) or Time Slip (> 39) to find the desired point.
≥ To skip to the start or end of a title/chapter press [:] (start) or [9] (end).
≥ For better precision, use Slow-motion (> 39) and Frame-by-Frame (> 39).
51
VQT2J51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapters—Creating and Editing
[RAM]
When creating chapters in your favourite scenes, you can easily
reach the head of scene using [:, 9] (SKIP) or play on
Chapter View.
Tips
To exit the menu screens
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
Tips
To view other pages
≥ Chapter
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next”, then press
[OK].
Each section between the division points becomes a
chapter.
– You can also press [:, 9] to view other pages.
Multiple editing
(Only Delete Chapter)
Title
Select with [3, 4, 2, 1], then press [;]. (Repeat.)
– A check mark appears. Press [;] again to cancel.
Chapter
Chapter
Chapter
Chapter
≥ [RAM]: You can change the order of chapters and create a
playlist (> 53).
Chapter Operations
“Chapter Creation” in the Setup menu (> 68)
“Automatic”:
Delete Chapter
Detects changes (special mute points like the start and the
end of the programme) in the scene during recording and sets
chapter start points on them automatically.
≥ Depending on the programme to be recorded or the
Recording Mode, the chapter start points may not be
created correctly.
You can delete the chapters for each title.
Important: Once deleted, recorded contents cannot be
recovered.
Perform steps 1 –
of “Accessing the Chapter View” (> left).
8 Press [3, 4] to select “Delete Chapter”, then press
“5 minutes”:
[OK].
Sets chapter start points automatically during recording at
approximately 5-minute interval.
9 Press [2] to select “Delete”, then press [OK].
Create Chapter
≥ Maximum numbers of chapters on a disc
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]: Approx. 1000
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]: Approx. 254
You can divide a title into multiple chapters.
Perform steps 1 –
of “Accessing the Chapter View” (> left).
8 Press [3, 4] to select “Create Chapter”, then press
[OK].
Accessing the Chapter View
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Create Chapter
VIDEO
DVD-RAM
Allows viewing and editing chapters individually.
08
PLAY
Delete Chapter
Create Chapter
Combine Chapters
Title View
Create
Finish
1 Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.
2 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
[RAM] When “VIDEO” is not selected, press the “Red”
0:43.21
button to select “VIDEO”.
3 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a title.
OK
RETURN
4 Press [OPTION] to display the OPTION
Delete
9 Press [OK] at the point you want to divide.
menu.
Properties
– For quicker editing (> 51, Tips)
– Repeat this step to create additional chapters.
: Press [3, 4] to select “Finish”, then press [OK].
5 Press [3, 4] to select “Chapter View”
then press [OK].
6 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a
Edit
Chapter View
PICTURE
chapter.
– Multiple editing (> right, Tips)
To play
Press [OK].
Notes
≥ A short portion of the title just after the creation point may be
lost.
To edit
Press [OPTION] to display the menu list.
Combine Chapters
Delete Chapter
You can combine the divided chapters.
Refer to “Chapter
Operations” (> right).
Create Chapter
Perform steps 1 –
of “Accessing the Chapter View” (> left).
Combine Chapters
8 Press [3, 4] to select “Combine Chapters”, then
Title View
press [OK].
9 Press [2] to select “Combine”, then press [OK].
– The selected chapter gets combined with the next
chapter.
You can go back to the Title View.
52
VQT2J51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating, Editing and Playing Playlists
[RAM]
[-RW‹VR›] (play only)
You can create playlists by grouping your favourite scenes
(chapters) from the recorded titles and edit the created playlists.
Creating Playlists
[RAM]
Perform steps 1 –
of “Accessing the Playlist View”. (> left)
4b
Tips
5 Press [2, 1] to select the source title, then press [4].
– Press [OK] to select all the chapters in the title, then
skip to step 7.
6 Press [2, 1] to select the source chapter you want to
add to a playlist, then press [OK].
[RAM]
A playlist is a compilation of your favourite chapters as shown
in the chart below.
– Press [3] to cancel.
Title
Title
– Press [OPTION] to select “Create Chapter”, then press
[OK] if you want to create a new chapter in the source
title (> 52).
Chapter
Chapter
Chapter
Chapter
Chapter
7 Press [2, 1] to select the position to insert the
chapter, then press [OK].
– Press [3] repeatedly to return to step 5, if you want to
add additional source titles.
Chapters are registered to the playlist. Repeat steps 6 and 7
to add other chapters.
Chapter
≥Editing playlists doesn’t modify titles.
≥Playlists are not recorded separately so this doesn’t use much
capacity.
Chapter
Playlist
8 Press [RETURN ] to finish and exit the screen.
Notes
≥ Playlists cannot be created while recording or copying.
≥ You are allowed a maximum of 99 playlists, with
approximately 1000 chapters per playlist.
Accessing the Playlist View
Preparation:
Editing Playlists/Chapters
≥ Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the drive containing the
recorded title to be edited.
≥ [RAM] Release protection (> 64, Setting Protection).
Delete
[RAM]
With the unit stopped
Use to delete unneeded playlists.
1 Press [FUNCTION MENU].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Others”, then press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Playlists”, then press [OK].
Important: Once deleted, playlists contents cannot be
recovered (titles are not affected).
FUNCTION MENU
FUNCTION MENU
Disc Protection Off
DVD-RAM
Disc Protection Off
DVD-RAM
Playback
Playback
Perform steps 1 –
of “Accessing the Playlist View”. (> left)
Playlists
Playlists
4c
Flexible Rec
DVD Management
Setup
Flexible Rec
DVD Management
Setup
Recording
Delete
Recording
Delete
5 Press [3, 4] to select “Delete”, then press [OK].
6 Press [2] to select “Delete”, then press [OK] to
confirm.
Copy
Copy
TV Guide
Others
TV Guide
Others
Drive Select
OK
Drive Select
OK
RETURN
RETURN
Tips
4a
4b
4c
To play
To delete during play
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the playlist to play, then
press [OK].
1. Press [DELETE ¢]. A confirmation message displays.
2. Press [2] to select “Delete”, then press [OK] to confirm.
To create
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Create”, then press
[OK] (> right, Creating Playlists).
Properties
To edit
[RAM] [-RW‹VR›]
Playlist information (e.g., length and date) is shown.
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the playlist, then press
[OPTION].
– Multiple editing (> 54, Tips in “Edit”)
Perform steps 1 –
of “Accessing the Playlist View”. (> left)
4c
5 Press [3, 4] to select “Properties”, then press [OK].
Create
Refer to “Editing
Copy
Tips
Playlists/Chapters”
Enter Name
Delete
(> right).
To exit the screen
Change Thumbnail
Properties
Press [OK].
Edit
Chapter View
If you select “Chapter View” (> 54)
53
VQT2J51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating, Editing and Playing Playlists
Chapter Operations
Add Chapter
Edit
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Add Chapter”,
then press [OK]. (> 53, Creating
Playlists)
[RAM]
You can create and copy playlists, and change the thumbnail.
Move Chapter 1 Press [3, 4] to select “Move Chapter”,
then press [OK].
Perform steps 1 –
of “Accessing the Playlist View” (> 53).
4c
5 Press [3, 4] to select “Edit”, then press [OK].
6 Press [3, 4] to select desired operation from the
menu displayed location, then press [OK] (> below).
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the
position to insert the chapter, then press
[OK].
Create
Copy
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Create”, then
Playlists
DVD-RAM
Move Chapter
press [OK]. (> 53, Creating Playlists)
10 12/10 TUE 0:11
001
---
002
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy”, then
0:10.24
0:19.36
press [OK].
2 Press [2] to select “Copy”, then press
---
---
[OK].
Previous
Page 01/01
Next
OK
Enter Name
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Enter Name”,
then press [OK].
RETURN
2 Enter a name for the playlist. (> 49,
Entering Text).
Create
Chapter
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Create Chapter”,
then press [OK].
2 Press [1] (PLAY). Use Time Slip (> 39),
Slow-motion (> 39), Frame-by-Frame
(> 39), or Search (> 38) to find the
desired point.
3 Press [OK] at the point you want to
divide.
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Finish”, then
press [OK].
Change
Thumbnail
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Change
Thumbnail”, then press [OK].
2 Press [1] (PLAY). Use Time Slip
(> 39), Slow-motion (> 39), Frame-by-
Frame (> 39), or Search (> 38) to find
the desired point.
3 Press [OK] at the image you wish you
use for your thumbnail.
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Finish”, then
Combine
Chapters
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Combine
Chapters”, then press [OK].
2 Press [2] to select “Combine”, then
press [OK].
press [OK].
– The thumbnail picture is now
changed.
– The selected chapter gets combined
Tips
with the next chapter.
To exit the menu screens
Delete
Chapter
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Delete Chapter”,
then press [OK].
2 Press [2] to select “Delete”, then press
[OK].
Press [EXIT].
To view other pages
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next”, then press
[OK].
– You can also press [:, 9] to view other pages.
Tips
To exit the menu screens
Multiple editing
(Only Delete, Copy)
Press [EXIT].
Select with [3, 4, 2, 1], then press [;]. (Repeat.)
– A check mark appears. Press [;] again to cancel.
To view other pages
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next”, then press
[OK].
– You can also press [:, 9] to view other pages.
Chapter View
Multiple editing
[RAM]
(Only Delete Chapter)
You can add, move, divide, combine or delete chapters in the
Select with [3, 4, 2, 1], then press [;]. (Repeat.)
– A check mark appears. Press [;] again to cancel.
playlist.
Perform steps 1 –
of “Accessing the Playlist View” (> 53).
4c
5 Press [3, 4] to select “Chapter View”, then press
[OK].
6 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a chapter.
– Multiple editing (> right, Tips)
To play
Press [OK].
To edit
Press [OPTION] to display the menu list.
Add Chapter
Move Chapter
Refer to “Chapter Operations”
(> right)
Create Chapter
Combine Chapters
Delete Chapter
Playlist View
You can go back to the Playlist View.
54
VQT2J51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Still Pictures—Editing
Accessing the Album (still picture)/Picture
View
Album (still picture)/Picture Operations
[RAM]
Notes
You can edit pictures and albums.
≥ Timer recordings do not start when performing “Add
Pictures” or “Create Album”.
Preparation:
≥ Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.
≥ Release protection (> 64, Setting Protection)
Add Pictures/Create Album
1 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
[RAM]
When “PICTURE” is not selected, press the “Green”
button to select “PICTURE”.
Perform steps 1 – 3 of “Accessing the Album (still picture)/
Picture View” (> left).
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Add Pictures” or “Create
Album”, then press [OK].
5 Press [2] to select “Start” or “Yes”, then press [OK].
6 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the album containing
picture to add, then press [OK].
Editing an album:
2
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the album.
– Multiple editing (> below, Tips)
– When you want to create an album using “Create
Album”, press [OPTION] without selecting album.
7 Press [3, 4] to select “Select pictures to copy” or
“Copy all pictures”, then press [OK].
≥ If “Select pictures to copy” is selected
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the picture, then press
[OK].
Editing a still picture:
2
1. Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the album which
contains the still picture to edit, then press [OK].
2. Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the still picture.
– Multiple editing (> below, Tips)
≥ If “Copy all pictures” is selected
All the still pictures in the album will be copied.
8 Press [1] to select “No” to finish copying, then press
[OK].
3 Press [OPTION] to display the menu list.
≥ Items that cannot be selected are grey.
e.g., Editing an album
– If you want to continue copying, select “Yes”, then
repeat steps 6 – 8.
Start Slideshow/Slideshow Settings
(> 43, 44)
Start Slideshow
Slideshow Settings
Only when you select “Create Album”
9 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” or “No”, then press [OK].
≥ If “Yes” is selected
Refer to “Album
(still picture)/
Picture
Operations”
(> right)
Add Pictures
Create Album
Edit Album
VIDEO
Delete Album
Enter Album Name
Set up Protection
Cancel Protection
You can give a name for the album (
>
49, Entering Text).
≥ If “No” is selected
The album name is automatically given.
e.g., Editing a still picture
Notes
≥
“Add Pictures” is available only for the folders conforming to DCF.
Delete Pictures
Refer to “Album (still picture)/
Picture Operations” (> right).
Properties
Set up Protection
Cancel Protection
Album View
Delete Album/Delete Pictures
[RAM] [-R] (JPEG)
You can go back to the Album View.
Important: Once deleted, contents cannot be recovered.
≥ When deleting an album, non-picture files in the album will
also be deleted. (This does not apply to subordinate folders in
the album.)
≥ [-R] Available space does not increase even after pictures are
deleted.
Notes
≥ You cannot edit still pictures recorded on DVD-R DL, CD-R/
CD-RW and USB memory.
Perform steps 1 – 3 of “Accessing the Album (still picture)/
Picture View” (> left).
≥ When editing an album, press [3, 4] to select “Edit Album”,
then press [OK] after step 3.
Tips
To view other pages
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next”, then press
[OK].
– You can also press [:, 9] to view other pages.
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Delete Album” or “Delete
Pictures”, then press [OK].
5 Press [2] to select “Delete”, then press [OK].
Multiple editing
[Only Delete Album, Delete Pictures, Set up Protection,
Cancel Protection.]
Select with [3, 4, 2, 1], then press [;]. (Repeat.)
– A check mark appears. Press [;] again to cancel.
Enter Album Name
[RAM]
To select all albums
Perform steps 1 – 3 of “Accessing the Album (still picture)/
Picture View” (> left).
≥ When editing an album, press [3, 4] to select “Edit Album”,
then press [OK] after step 3.
Press [∫]. After confirmation message appears, press [2] to
select “Yes”.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Enter Album Name”, then
press [OK].
To exit the menu screens
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
– You can give a name for the album (> 49, Entering
Text).
Notes
≥ Album names entered using this unit may not be displayed
on other equipment.
55
VQT2J51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Still Pictures—Editing
Set up Protection/Cancel Protection
Deleting still pictures using DELETE
Navigator
[RAM]
Set protection to prevent pictures from being accidentally
deleted.
[RAM]
Preparation:
≥ Release protection (> 64, Setting Protection)
Perform steps 1 – 3 of “Accessing the Album (still picture)/
Picture View” (> 55).
≥ When editing an album, press [3, 4] to select “Edit Album”,
then press [OK] after step 3.
Important: Once deleted, contents cannot be recovered.
1 Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD.
2 Press [FUNCTION MENU].
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Delete”, then press [OK].
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Set up Protection” or “Cancel
Protection”, then press [OK].
5 Press [2] to select “Yes”, then press [OK].
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Picture”, then press [OK].
– The lock symbol “ ” appears when the still picture or
album is protected.
FUNCTION MENU
DELETE Navigator
DVD-RAM
Album View
002
VIDEO
PICTURE
DVD-RAM
Disc Protection Off
-
-
-
001
Playback
Recording
Delete
Video
Picture
10/ 10/ 10 Total
5
10/ 10/ 10 Total
3
Notes
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Copy
≥ Even if you set protection using this unit, album may be
TV Guide
Others
deleted by other equipment.
Drive Select
OK
Previous
Page 01/01
Select
Next
RETURN
OK
Press OK to show
pictures.
OPTION
RETURN
Properties
Deleting an album:
5a Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the item, then press
[DELETE ¢].
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]
Information (e.g., image size and file size) is shown.
Perform steps 1 – 3 of “Accessing the Album (still picture)/
Picture View” (> 55).
Deleting a still picture:
1. Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the album which
contains the still picture to delete, then press [OK].
2. Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the still picture, press
[OK].
5b
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Properties”, then press [OK].
≥ To exit the Properties screen, press [OK].
6 Press [2, 1] to select “Delete”, then press [OK].
Notes
≥ You cannot delete while recording or copying.
Tips
To view other pages
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next”, then press
[OK].
– You can also press [:, 9] to view other pages.
Multiple editing
Select with [3, 4, 2, 1], then press [;]. (Repeat.)
– A check mark appears. Press [;] again to cancel.
– [RAM] Deleting an item increases the available space by the
amount of space taken by the item deleted.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
56
VQT2J51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying Titles or Playlists
8 Press [2] to select “Yes”, then press [OK] to start
copying.
Preparation:
– Copying continues until the set time even if the
playback of the programme you wish to copy finishes.
Note that copying is automatically stopped when the
tape reaches the end or the remaining capacity of the
copy destination is filled.
≥ Insert a disc and video cassette that you can use for
copying (> 7).
≥ Confirm that there is enough remaining disc or tape space.
≥ When copying an NTSC tape to a DVD, change the “TV
System” to “NTSC” in the Setup Menu (> 70).
This unit cannot record NTSC signals to discs that already
have PAL signal recordings.
9 [VHS] > [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
Press [2, 1] to select “Copy & Finalise” or “Copy
Only”, then press [OK].
– If “Copy & Finalise” is selected
Copying Titles (VHS > DVD)
After finalising, the discs become play-only and you can
also play them on other DVD equipment. However, you
can no longer record or edit.
[VHS] > [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
1 Press [FUNCTION MENU].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy”, then press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Advanced Copy”, then press
[OK].
Tips
To stop copying
Press and hold [RETURN ] for 3 seconds.
(You cannot stop while finalising.)
Copy
Cancel All
Source
VHS
DVD
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
1 Copy Direction
VHS DVD
Destination
Copy Mode
2
VHS-Video
SP
Off
Copy Time
3
Notes
Select the copy direction.
Start Copying
OK
≥ To play DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format)
+R and +R DL on other players, it is necessary to finalise
them after copy.
RETURN
4 Set the copy direction.
–If you are not going to change the copying direction, press [4]
(> step 5).
About FR mode
When “Time Setting” is set to “Off” in step 6 (> left):
≥ The recording mode is automatically selected by estimating
the remaining capacity of the disc for copying of only the
recorded parts in the video cassette (unrecorded parts will
not be recorded).
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Direction”, then press [1].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Source”, then press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select “VHS”, then press [OK].
– “Destination” is automatically set to “DVD”.
4 Press [2] to confirm.
≥ When you press [OK] to start copy, the tape is automatically
fast-forwarded to the end and then fast-rewound to the
beginning before the copying is actually started. It may take
time to start copy. If the remaining capacity of the disc is
insufficient, the copying will be stopped in the middle.
≥ The recording is divided into titles every time the tape index
signals are detected.
5 Set the recording mode.
–If you are not going to change the recording mode, press [4]
(> step 6).
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Mode”, then press [1].
– “Format” is automatically set to “VHS-Video”.
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Recording Mode”, then press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select the mode, then press [OK].
4 Press [2] to confirm.
When “Time Setting” is set to “On” in step 6 (> left):
≥ The recording mode is automatically determined by
estimating the remaining capacity of the disc for copying of
the contents equivalent to the recording time set from the
start point of the copying on the video cassette (unrecorded
parts will also be recorded).
6 Set “Copy Time”.
–If you are not going to change the setting press [4] (> step 7).
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Time”, then press [1].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Time Setting”, then press [OK].
≥ The recording is not divided into titles.
–Setting the unit to copy all the content on the video cassette
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Off”, then press [OK].
4 Press [2] to confirm.
–Setting the unit to copy according to the set time
3 Press [3, 4] to select “On”, then press [OK].
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Time”, then press [OK].
Copy
Cancel All
1 Copy Direction
VHS DVD
2
hour
00 min.
Copy Mode
2
3
VHS-Video SP
Set the time a few minutes
longer.
Copy Time
5 Press [2, 1] to select “hour” and “min.”, then press [3, 4]
to set the recording time.
6 Press [OK].
7 Press [2] to confirm.
–You can also set the recording time with the numbered buttons.
7 Press [3, 4] to select “Start Copying”, then press
[OK].
57
VQT2J51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying Titles or Playlists
7 Press [3, 4] to select “Start Copying”, then press
Copying Titles or Playlists (DVD > VHS)
[OK].
8 Press [2] to select “Yes”, then press [OK] to start
[RAM] [-RW‹VR›] [+RW] > [VHS]
copying.
1 Press [FUNCTION MENU].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy”, then press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Advanced Copy”, then press
[OK].
Edit the copying list
Select the item in step 6–5 (> left)
Press [OPTION].
Delete All
Copy
Add
Cancel All
Source
DVD
VHS
Delete
Move
1 Copy Direction
DVDVHS
Destination
Copy Mode
2
Video SP
0
Create List
3
Select the copy direction.
Start Copying
OK
Delete All
Delete all items registered on the copying
RETURN
list.
1. Press [3, 4] to select “Delete All”, then
–If you are not going to change the registered list, press [4]
several times (> step 7).
press [OK].
2. Press [2] to select “Yes”, then press
4 Set the copy direction.
[OK].
–If you are not going to change the copying direction, press [4]
(> step 5).
Add
Add new items to the copying list.
1. Press [3, 4] to select “Add”, then press
[OK].
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Direction”, then press [1].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Source”, then press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select “DVD”, then press [OK].
– “Destination” is automatically set to “VHS”.
4 Press [2] to confirm.
2. Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the title or
playlist, then press [;].
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this
step until you select all necessary items.
≥Press [;] again to cancel.
3. Press [OK].
5 Set the recording mode.
–If you are not going to change the recording mode, press [4]
(> step 6).
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Mode”, then press [1].
– “Format” is automatically set to “VIDEO”.
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Recording Mode”, then press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select the mode, then press [OK].
4 Press [2] to confirm.
Delete
Move
Delete the selected items.
1. Press [3, 4] to select “Delete”, then
press [OK].
2. Press [2] to select “Yes”, then press
[OK].
6 Register titles and playlists for copy.
–If you are going to copy a registered list without making any
changes to it (> step 7).
Move selected items or change the order of
items on the copying list.
1. Press [3, 4] to select “Move”, then
press [OK].
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Create List”, then press [1].
Copy
2. Press [3, 4] to select the destination,
then press [OK].
Cancel All
Destination Remaining: 2 : 32
Size: 0 : 00
( 0%)
1 Copy Direction
No. Size
Name of item
DVD VHS
New item (Total=0)
Copy Mode
VIDEO SP
2
Cancel all registered copying setting and lists
Create List
3
After performing steps 1–3 (> left)
Page 01/01
Create copy list.
Start Copying
OK
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Cancel All”, then press [OK].
5 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes”, then press [OK].
OPTION
RETURN
2 Press [3, 4] to select “New item”, then press [OK].
3 Press the “Red” button to select “VIDEO” or press the “Green”
button to select “Playlists”.
≥ The settings and lists may be cancelled in the following
situations.
– When a title or a playlist has been recorded or deleted at
the copy source
– When steps have been taken, for instance, to turn off the
unit, open the tray, change the copy direction, etc.
Create List
DVD-RAM
VIDEO Playlists
07
08
0:30(XP)
BBC 1 10/10 FRI
- -
BBC 1 11/10 SAT
- -
- -
Previous
Page 02/02
Select
Next
Previous
OK
OPTION
Next
RETURN
4 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the title or playlist, then press
[;].
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all
necessary items.
– Press [;] again to cancel.
– The items will be copied in the order of the copying list. If
you want to specify the order, repeat selecting one item at a
time.
– When you switch between the “VIDEO” and “Playlists” tab,
the check mark is cancelled.
– To view other pages (> 59, Tips)
5 Press [OK] to confirm.
– To edit the copying list (> right)
6 Press [2] to confirm.
58
VQT2J51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
–Setting the unit to copy according to the set time
3 Press [3, 4] to select “On”, then press [OK].
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Time”, then press [OK].
Copying list icons and functions
The following icons give more information about copy
restrictions of the title.
Copy
Cancel All
1 Copy Direction
DVD VHS
Title with “One time only recording” restriction
(> 27, Copy-once recording)
2
hour
00 min.
Copy Mode
2
3
VHS-Video SP
Set the time a few minutes
longer.
Copy Time
Title or playlist contains still picture(s)
≥ Still picture(s) cannot be copied.
5 Press [2, 1] to select “hour” and “min.”, then press [3, 4]
to set the recording time.
6 Press [OK].
Title or playlist recorded using a different encoding
system from that of the TV system currently
selected on the unit.
7 Press [2] to confirm.
Copying to the VHS continues for the set time even after the
content being played finishes.
(NTSC)
(PAL)
≥ Titles and playlists displaying these marks
cannot be selected.
–Set a few minutes longer than the source title, in order to
include the operation time before play begins.
–You can also set the recording time with the numbered buttons.
Data size of each registered item
7 Press [3, 4] to select “Start Copying”, then press
[OK].
Destination Remaining: 3:01
Size:
Size: 0:00 (0%)
No. Size
Name of item
8 Press [2] to select “Yes”, then press [OK] to start
Data size recorded to the copy destination
≥The total data size will change according to the
recording mode.
≥The total data size shown may be larger than
the sum of the data sizes for each registered
item, because of data management information
being written to the copy destination, etc.
New item (Total=0)
copying. The disc top menu is displayed.
–Disc play automatically begins from title 1 when “Title 1” is
selected from the “Auto-Play Select” menu when finalising the
disc (> 65).
Page 01/01
Create copy list.
9 When the top menu is displayed
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the title you want to start
copying, then press [OK].
Tips
My favourite
01/02
To view other pages
01
Chapter
02
Chapter
1
3
2
4
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next”, then press
[OK].
03
Chapter
04
Chapter
– You can also press [:, 9] to show other pages.
05
06
To stop copying
Press and hold [RETURN ] for 3 seconds.
(You cannot stop while finalising)
While playing in order, all the titles after the selected title are
recorded until the set time. (After the last title on the disc has
finished playing the top menu is recorded until the set time is
reached.)
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
Tips
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
Copying a finalised DVD-R, DVD-R DL,
DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R and
+R DL
To stop copying
Press [∫].
You can also press and hold [RETURN ] for 3 seconds to
stop copying.
≥ If stopped partway, copying will be up to that point.
[DVD-V] > [VHS]
You can copy the content of finalised DVD-R, DVD-R DL,
DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, and +R DL to the VHS.
While playing a disc, the content being played is copied to the
VHS according to the set time
Notes
≥ The screen on the right is recorded at the
beginning.
≥ Operations and on-screen displays during copy are also
recorded.
≥ Almost all DVD-Video on sale have been treated to prevent
illegal copying, and cannot be copied.
≥ If play does not begin automatically or if
the top menu does not display
automatically, press [1] (PLAY) to start.
≥ Even if you copy a high quality video/audio
DVD, the original picture and audio quality
cannot be exactly replicated.
≥ If you want to copy a title from a finalised DVD-RW (DVD
Video Recording format), create a copy list and then copy
(> 58, Copying Titles or Playlists (DVD > VHS)).
Preparation:
≥ Insert the finalised disc (> 7).
≥ Insert a video cassette that you can use for copying (> 7).
After performing steps 1–5 (“Format” is automatically set to
“DVD-Video”) (> 58, Copying Titles or Playlists (DVD > VHS))
6 Set “Copy Time”.
– If you are not going to change the setting (> step 7).
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Time”, then press [1].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Time Setting”, then press [OK].
–Setting the unit to copy all the content on the disc
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Off”, then press [OK].
4 Press [2] to confirm.
Copy will continue until there is not enough available
recording space on the VHS.
59
VQT2J51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying Still Pictures
[RAM] > [RAM]
Edit the copying list
After performing steps 1–3 (> 58, Copying Titles or Playlists
Select the item in step 4–4 (for a still picture) (> left) or
4–6 (for a folder) (> left)
(DVD > VHS))
1 Set “Source” and “Destination” to “DVD”. (
>
step 4)
Press [OPTION].
Delete All
[USB] > [RAM]
Add
1 While stopped
Delete
Insert the USB memory (> 7).
The menu is automatically displayed. (> 42)
Delete All Delete all items registered on the copying list.
1. Press [3, 4] to select “Delete All”, then press
[OK].
2
Press [
[OK].
3
,
4] to select “Picture ( JPEG )”, then press
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Selected Pictures
2. Press [2] to select “Yes”, then press [OK].
( JPEG )”, then press [OK].
Add
Add new items to the copying list.
1. Press [3, 4] to select “Add”, then press [OK].
2. Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the still picture
or folder to be added, then press [;].
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step
until you select all necessary items.
≥Press [;] again to cancel.
–“Source”, “Destination”, “Format” and “Recording Mode” are
automatically set to “USB”, “DVD”, “PICTURE” and “High
Speed” respectively.
Copy
Cancel All
Source
USB
DVD
1
2
3
Copy Direction
USB DVD
Destination
Copy Mode
PICTURE High Speed
3. Press [OK].
0
Create List
Delete
Delete the selected items.
Start Copying
Select the copy direction.
1. Press [
3
,
4] to select “Delete”, then press [OK].
OK
RETURN
2. Press [2] to select “Yes”, then press [OK].
4 Register still pictures for copy.
–If you are going to copy a registered list without making any
changes to it (> step 5).
Cancel all registered copying setting and lists
After performing steps 1–3 (> left)
You can register still pictures or still picture folders.
–Still pictures and folders cannot be registered on the same list.
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Cancel All”, then press [OK].
5 Press [2] to select “Yes”, then press [OK].
≥ The settings and lists may be cancelled in the following
situations.
Copy
Destination Capacity: 4343MB
Cancel All
Picture
Picture/Folder
1
2
Copy Direction
No. Size
Name of item
New item (Total=0)
– When a still picture has been recorded or deleted at the copy
source
– When steps have been taken, for instance, to turn off the
unit, remove the USB memory, open the tray, etc.
USB DVD
Copy Mode
PICTURE High Speed
To register individual still pictures
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Create List”, then press [1].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “New item”, then press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the still picture, then press [;].
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all
necessary items.
≥Press [;] again to cancel.
≥The items will be copied in the order of the copying list. If
you want to specify the order, repeat selecting one item at a
time.
– To show other pages (> 61, Tips)
– To select another folder (> 61, Tips)
4 Press [OK] to confirm.
– To edit the copying list (> right)
5 Press [2] to confirm.
To register on a folder by folder basis
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Create List”, then press [1].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Picture/Folder”, then press [OK].
Copy
Destination Capacity: 4343MB
Cancel All
Picture
Picture/Folder
1
Copy Direction
No. Size
Name of item
New item (Total=0)
USB DVD
Copy Mode
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Folder”, then press [OK].
4 Press [3, 4] to select “New item”, then press [OK].
5 Press [3, 4] to select the folder, then press [;].
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all
necessary items.
≥Press [;] again to cancel.
≥
The items will be copied in the order of the copying list. If you
want to specify the order, repeat selecting one item at a time.
– To show other pages (> 61, Tips)
6 Press [OK] to confirm.
7 Repeat steps 4–6 until you select all necessary folders.
– To edit the copying list (> right)
8 Press [2] to confirm.
5 Press [3, 4] to select “Start Copying”, then press
[OK].
6 Press [2] to select “Yes”, then press [OK] to start
copying.
60
VQT2J51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tips
To stop copying
Press and hold [RETURN ] for 3 seconds.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
To view other pages
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next”, then press
[OK].
– You can also press [:, 9] to view other pages.
To select another folder
After performing step 4–2 (> 60, To register individual still
pictures)
1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Folder”, then press [OK].
2 Press [3, 4] to select the folder, then press [OK].
Create List
USB
Create List
USB
Picture (JPEG)
Folder
Folder
JPEG
\JPEG
0001
----
----
0002
----
----
0003
----
0004
----
001 100__DVD
002 101__DVD
003 102__DVD
004 103__DVD
---
---
---
---
----
----
Page 01/01
Picture 0012 File 0012
Page 001/001
Previous
Next
OK
OK
RETURN
RETURN
You can also select folders with the numbered buttons.
e.g., 5:
[0] > [0] > [5]
15: [0] > [1] > [5]
115: [1] > [1] > [5]
The still pictures of different folders cannot be registered on
the same list.
Notes
≥ Copy Mode is fixed at “PICTURE High Speed”.
≥ The structure of folders on the USB memory may not be the
same at the copy destination.
≥ The sequence in which the still pictures are registered on
the copy list may not be the same at the copy destination.
≥ If the space on the destination drive runs out or the number
of files/folders to be copied exceeds the maximum (> 28),
copying will stop partway through.
≥ You cannot copy the information about the picture rotation.
61
VQT2J51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting
Menus
Setting On-Screen Display
Disc Menu
Accessing the On-Screen Display
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›] [VCD]
You can change the settings of disc audio, subtitle, etc.
When playing discs (except for JPEG discs), you can display
and set the options including disc audio, subtitle, image quality,
sound effect, Repeat Play, etc. In addition, when receiving the
multi-audio broadcast, you can change the audio settings.
Menu options will differ based on disc type and contents.
Soundtrack
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
The disc’s audio attributes appear (> below, Audio attributes).
[DVD-V]
1 Press [DISPLAY].
Select the audio and language (> below, Audio attributes,
Soundtrack/Subtitle language).
[VCD] (SVCD)
Select the soundtrack number.
≥ Soundtrack numbers are displayed even when there is only
one audio type.
Subtitles
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
(Only discs that contain subtitle on/off information)
Turn the subtitle on/off.
Menu
Item
Setting
2 Press [3, 4] to select a menu, then press [1].
3 Press [3, 4] to select an item, then press [1].
4 Press [3, 4] to select a setting.
Follow the on-screen prompts to change individual
settings.
≥ Subtitle on/off information cannot be recorded using this unit.
[DVD-V]
Turn the subtitle on/off and select the language (> below,
Soundtrack/Subtitle language).
[VCD] (SVCD)
Turn the subtitle on/off and select the subtitle number.
≥ Subtitle numbers are displayed even if there are not multiple
subtitles.
Notes
≥ Some settings may not be changeable, based on the unit’s
current activity (playing, stopped, etc.) and disc contents.
≥ When the VHS drive is selected, you can only set “Copy
NR”, “DVB Multi Audio” and “Position”.
Audio channel
[RAM] [-RW‹VR›] [VCD]
Change audio during playback.
LR / L / R
Tips
Angle
To exit the on-screen display
Press [DISPLAY].
[DVD-V]
Change the number to select an angle.
PBC (Playback control > 92) [VCD]
Indicates whether menu play (playback control) is on or off.
Soundtrack/Subtitle language
ENG: English
FRA: French
DEU: German
DAN: Danish
THA: Thai
POR: Portuguese POL: Polish
RUS: Russian
JPN: Japanese
CHI: Chinese
KOR: Korean
MAL: Malay
CES: Czech
SLK: Slovak
HUN: Hungarian
ITA:
Italian
ESP: Spanish
NLD: Dutch
SVE: Swedish
FIN:
¢:
Finnish
Others
NOR: Norwegian VIE:
Vietnamese
Audio attributes
Signal type
LPCM/ Digital/DTS/MPEG:
k (kHz):
Sampling frequency
Number of bits
Number of channels
b (bit):
ch (channel):
Notes
≥ You cannot make a change when there is no recording.
≥ Some discs allow changes to soundtracks, subtitles, and
angles only by using the disc’s menus (> 20).
62
VQT2J51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Play Menu
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›] [CD]
[VCD]
Repeat Play
This function works only when the elapsed play time is
displayed.
Select the item for repeat play. Depending on the disc, the items
that can be selected will differ.
Select “Off” to cancel.
Picture Menu
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›]
You can change the noise reduction setting when playing discs
or of images from the connected device.
Playback NR
Reduces noise and picture degradation while playing.
≥ On:
≥ Off:
Reduces noise and picture degradation.
Video is played back as it is.
Copy NR
Reduces the noise while recording.
≥ Automatic:
Noise reduction only works on picture input
from a video tape.
≥ On:
Noise reduction works for any video input.
≥ Off:
Noise reduction is off. Select when you want to
record input as is.
Sound Menu
You can change the settings of audio when receiving the multi-
audio broadcast, and also change the settings of sound effect
when playing discs.
DVB Multi Audio
[MPEG Audio only]
If more than one audio channel is output, you can set the
desired channel before recording.
≥ DVB Multi Audio cannot be selected during playback or
recording.
≥ Depending on the broadcast, the items that can be selected
will differ.
English 1/ English 2
Dialogue Enhancer
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›]
(Dolby Digital, 3-channel or over only, including a centre
channel)
When “On”, the volume of the centre channel is raised to make
dialogue easier to hear.
Other Menu
Position
Change where this menu screen appears on your TV.
63
VQT2J51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DVD Management
You can manage discs through formatting, finalising and other
operations.
Deleting All Titles
You can delete all titles on the single-sided DVD-RAM at once.
Accessing the Management Menus
Important: Once deleted, contents cannot be recovered.
Preparation:
[RAM]
≥ [RAM] Release protection (> below, “Setting Protection”).
Perform preparation steps 1–4 of “Accessing the
Management Menus” (> left).
≥ Insert a disc.
5 Press [3, 4] to select “Delete all titles”, then press
[OK].
6 Press [2] to select “Yes”, then press [OK].
7 Press [2] to select “Start”, then press [OK].
– A message appears when deleting is finished.
8 Press [OK] to complete.
With the unit stopped
1 Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.
2 Press [FUNCTION MENU].
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Others”, then press [OK].
FUNCTION MENU
DVD-RAM
Disc Protection Off
Playback
Recording
Delete
Playlists
Flexible Rec
DVD Management
Setup
Notes
≥ Deleting does not work if one or more titles are protected.
≥ Still picture data (JPEG) or computer data cannot be
deleted.
Copy
TV Guide
Others
Drive Select
OK
RETURN
Formatting Discs
4 Press [3, 4] to select “DVD Management”, then
[RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
[+R] [+R]DL] (New disc only)
press [OK].
Formatting is the process of making media such as DVD-RAM
recordable on recording equipment.
Tips
To return to the previous screen
You can record or edit after formatting the finalised DVD-RW.
Press [RETURN ].
Important: Once formatted, contents cannot be recovered.
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
Perform preparation steps 1–4 of “Accessing the
Management Menus” (> left).
5 Press [3, 4] to select “Format Disc”, then press
[OK].
6 Press [2] to select “Yes”, then press [OK].
7 Press [2] to select “Start”, then press [OK].
– Formatting starts ([RAM] may take up to a maximum of
70 minutes).
Naming Discs
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
You can give a name for the disc.
Perform preparation steps 1–4 of “Accessing the
Management Menus” (> above).
– A message appears when formatting is finished.
8 Press [OK] to complete.
5 Press [3, 4] to select “Disc Name”, then press [OK].
Entering Text (> 49).
Notes
Tips
≥ Do not disconnect the AC mains lead while formatting.
This can render the disc unusable.
≥ [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] With a finalised disc, the
name is displayed on the Top Menu.
≥ When a disc has been formatted using this unit, it may not
be possible to use it on any other equipment.
≥ [-R] [-R]DL] [CD] Formatting cannot be performed.
≥ [-RW‹V›] [-RW‹VR›] You can format only as DVD-Video format
on this unit.
≥ The message “Unable to format” appears when trying to
format discs the unit cannot use.
≥ [+RW] The disc name is displayed only if you play the disc on
other equipment after creating top menu.
Setting Protection
[RAM]
Use to prevent accidental erasure of disc.
Perform preparation steps 1–4 of “Accessing the
Management Menus” (> above).
Selecting Whether to Show the Top Menu First —Auto-
Play Select
5 Press [3, 4] to select “Disc Protection”, then press
[OK].
6 Press [2] to select “Yes”, then press [OK].
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
Before finalising a disc, select whether the top menu shows
after finalising.
Perform preparation steps 1–4 of “Accessing the
Management Menus” (> left).
5 Press [3, 4] to select “Auto-Play Select”, then press
[OK].
6 Press [3, 4] to select “Top Menu” or “Title 1”, then
press [OK].
≥ Top Menu:
The Top Menu appears first.
≥ Title 1:
The disc content is played without displaying the Top
Menu.
64
VQT2J51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Finalising
Enabling the Second Layer on DL (Dual- or Double-Layer
on Single Side) Discs to be Recordable
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
[-R]DL] [+R]DL]
You can play these discs on compatible DVD players by
finalising it on the unit, effectively making it into DVD-Video that
complies with DVD-Video standards. The menu you create with
the unit can also be used on most DVD players.
DVD-R DL and +R DL discs have two layers of recording
surface on one side. As this unit does not offer seamless
recording on two layers, recording stops when space on the first
layer becomes full. You must close the first layer to start
recording on the second layer. Closing makes the first layer
unavailable for recording (editing is still possible).
Perform preparation steps 1–4 of “Accessing the
Management Menus” (> 64).
Perform preparation steps 1–4 of “Accessing the
Management Menus” (> 64).
5 Press [3, 4] to select “Finalise”, then press [OK].
6 Press [2] to select “Yes”, then press [OK].
7 Press [2] to select “Start”, then press [OK].
– Finalising starts and cannot be cancelled (may take up
to 15 minutes) ([-R]DL] [+R]DL] up to 60 minutes)
– A message appears when finalising is finished.
8 Press [OK] to complete.
5 Press [3, 4] to select “Close First Layer”, then press
[OK].
6 Press [2] to select “Yes”, then press [OK].
7 Press [2] to select “Start”, then press [OK].
8 Press [OK] to complete.
Notes
Notes
≥ Do not disconnect the AC mains lead while finalising. This
can render the disc unusable.
≥ The first layer cannot be closed when there is no recording
on it.
≥ When finalising a high-speed recording compatible disc, it
may take longer than displayed on the confirmation screen
(approximately 4 times longer).
≥ After finalising
– [-R] [-R]DL] [+R] [+R]DL] The disc becomes play-only and
you can no longer record or edit it.
≥ Closing cannot be cancelled once started.
≥ Do not disconnect the AC mains lead while closing the
layer. This can render the disc unusable.
≥ Closing takes several minutes, up to a maximum of 30
minutes, depending on the remaining space on the first
layer.
– [-RW‹V›] You can record and edit the disc after formatting
although it becomes play-only after finalising.
– The disc finalised on the unit may not be playable on
other players depending on the condition of the recording.
– There is a pause of several seconds between titles and
chapters during playback.
Tips
≥ You can confirm the remaining recording time on the layer in
the DVD Management screen.
– Chapters are created automatically
DVD
Management
DVD-R DL
Titles
Used
1
Remain 3:54(LP)
([-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] about 5-minute chapters§ [+R] [+R]DL]
about 8-minute chapters§).
This time varies greatly depending on the condition and
mode of recording.
0 : 00 of the first layer
Disc Name
§
Auto-Play Select
Top Menu
Tips
≥ After you have finished recording or copying and try to eject
the disc, a screen asking if you want to finalise the disc
appears (> 29).
Create Top Menu
[+RW]
+RW discs contain no Top Menu data. Top Menu is a
convenient function. We recommend you create the menu
before playing a +RW disc on other equipment.
Perform preparation steps 1–4 of “Accessing the
Management Menus” (> 64).
5 Press [3, 4] to select “Create Top Menu”, then press
[OK].
6 Press [2] to select “Yes”, then press [OK].
7 Press [2] to select “Start”, then press [OK].
– “Create Top Menu” cannot be cancelled once started.
– “Create Top Menu” takes a few minutes.
8 Press [OK] to complete.
Notes
≥ Recording or editing on the disc may delete the Top Menu.
In that case, create the Top Menu again.
≥ You cannot use the Top Menu for playing on this unit.
65
VQT2J51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Channel Settings
Setup Menu
You can change the unit’s settings using Setup menu.
>
Others
>
Setup
Accessing the Setup Menu
With the unit stopped
1 Press [FUNCTION MENU].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Others” and press [OK].
(> left, Accessing the Setup Menu)
All factory default settings are indicated with “Underlined” text.
FUNCTION MENU
DVD-RAM
Disc Protection Off
Playback
Recording
Delete
Playlists
Tuning
Flexible Rec
DVD Management
Setup
3, 4 select “Tuning” > 1 > 3, 4 select item >
Copy
OK
TV Guide
Others
Drive Select
OK
Favourites Edit
Setup
RETURN
DVB Auto Setup by Signal Quality
DVB Auto Setup by Region
DVB Manual Tuning
Add New DVB Channels
Signal Condition
Tuning
Disc
Picture
Sound
Display
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Setup”, then press [OK].
4 Press [3, 4] to select a menu, then press [1] to
go to the item list.
DVB Preferred Multi Audio English
DVB Preferred Subtitles
English
Connection
VHS
Others
SELECT
TAB
Menus
Item
Options
RETURN
Setup
Remote Control
Clock
Owner ID
Standby Settings
System Update
Initialize
DVD 1
Favourites Edit
You can create four Favourites of channels for making viewing
and recording easier. Editing these Favourites does not affect the
channel setting itself.
Tuning
Disc
Picture
Sound
Display
Connection
VHS
≥Timer recording may not work correctly if you edit the
Favourites during timer recording standby.
SELECT
≥
Channel numbers cannot be changed, due to broadcast restrictions.
TAB
RETURN
Others
Favourites Edit
Setup
5 Press [3, 4] to select an item to change, then
press [OK].
6 Press [3, 4] to select the option, then press [OK].
DVB Auto Setup by Signal Quality
DVB Auto Setup by Region
DVB Manual Tuning
Add New DVB Channels
Signal Condition
Favourites Editor
Favourite 1
1 BBC ONE Wales
2 BBC 2W
3 BBC THREE
4 BBC FOUR
5 CBeebies
6 BBC PARLMNT
7 Community
8 CBBC Channel
9 1Xtra BBC
Tuning
Disc
All Channels
Picture
Sound
Display
Connection
VHS
DVB Preferred Multi Audio Eng
DVB Preferred Subtitles
Eng
Notes
TAB
≥ Changed settings remain intact even when switching the
SELECT
Others
RETURN
OK
unit to standby mode.
Favourite Select
Add
Add All
SELECT
Page +
Page –
RETURN
To select the Favourite
Press the “Green” button.
Tips
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ]. Even if you have changed an option,
the change is not activated until you press [OK].
To add channels to a Favourite
1
Press [3, 4] to select the channel in the “All Channels”
column to add, then press the “Yellow” button.
≥Repeat this step to add other channels.
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
≥Press the “Blue” button to add all the available channels to
the Favourite. (Only when no channels have been added to
the Favourite.)
2
Press [OK] to save the Favourite.
To change the order of channels of a Favourite
1
2
Press [1]§.
Press [3, 4] to select the channel in the “Favourite”
column to move, then press the “Green” button.
Press [3, 4] to select the new position of the channel,
then press the “Green” button.
3
≥Repeat the steps 2–3 to move other channels.
Press [OK] to save the Favourite.
4
To delete channels on a Favourite
1
2
Press [1]§.
Press [3, 4] to select the channel in the “Favourite”
column, then press the “Yellow” button.
≥Repeat this step to delete other channels.
≥Press the “Blue” button to delete all the channels from the
Favourite.
3
Press [OK] to save the Favourite.
Deleting a channel from a Favourite does not affect the
channel itself.
You can still select the channel from the “All Channels” column.
To change the name of a Favourite in the “Favourite”
column
1
Press [1]§.
2
Press the “Red” button. (> 49, Entering Text)
When the station name of the “All Channels” column is
highlighted
§
Tips
To browse through the list
Press [W X CH].
66
VQT2J51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Signal Condition
DVB Auto Setup by Signal Quality
You can check the quality and strength of digital broadcast signals.
DVB Auto Setup by Region
You can restart auto channel setting for digital terrestrial channels if
the setup (> 13) fails for some reason.
If you want to set the channel list best suited to your region, select
“DVB Auto Setup by Region”. Follow the on-screen instructions to
select the region you live in.
When “Signal Condition” is displayed in grey and cannot be
selected:
1
2
Press [EXIT] to exit the screen.
Press [W X CH] to select a digital channel. “D” appears on the
unit’s display.
3
Display the Setup menu again.
However, if you perform “DVB Auto Setup by Signal Quality” or “DVB
Auto Setup by Region”, all channel settings, Favourites and all the
timer recording programmes are deleted. (All the settings except for
the ratings level, ratings PIN, Owner ID, Clock and remote control
code, etc. return to the factory preset.)
Favourites Edit
Setup
DVB Auto Setup by Signal Quality
DVB Auto Setup by Region
Tuning
DVB Manual Tuning
Add New DVB Channels
Signal Condition
Disc
Picture
Sound
Display
Connection
VHS
Others
When the confirmation screen appears
Press [2] to select “Yes”, then press [OK].
DVB Preferred Multi Audio English
DVB Preferred Subtitles
DVB Signal Condition
Eng
DVB Channel
Signal Quality
Signal Strength
[CH54] 20 BBC ONE Wales
TAB
SELECT
Tips
0
0
10
RETURN
OK
0
≥You can also use the following method to restart DVB Auto Setup
by Signal Quality.
Channel+
Channel–
RETURN
When the unit is turned on and stopped, press and hold [CH W]
and [X CH] on the main unit simultaneously for about 5 seconds.
– Auto-Setup screen appears.
The quality and strength of the signal are shown.
Press [W X CH] to select the channel.
Signal Quality
Below 2 (display red)
DVB Manual Tuning
You can set channels manually if the “DVB Auto Setup by Signal
Quality” could not be completed successfully.
The signal quality is so poor that there
may be interference in the pictures and
sound.
Favourites Edit
Setup
2–5 (display orange)
The signal quality is basically adequate,
but brief interference in the pictures and
sound is possible in isolated case.
DVB Auto Setup by Signal Quality
DVB Auto Setup by Region
DVB Manual Tuning
Add New DVB Channels
Signal Condition
DVB Manual Tuning
Tuning
Frequency
[CH54]
738.0 MHz
10
10
Disc
Signal Quality
Signal Strength
0
0
Picture
Sound
Display
Connection
VHS
Over 5 (display green)
Optimum picture and sound quality.
No.
Channel Name
Type
New
DVB Preferred Multi Audio Eng
DVB Preferred Subtitles
Eng
Signal Strength
TAB
SELECT
The display for signal strength is grey. “0” means signal strength 0%,
“10” means signal strength 100%.
Others
RETURN
OK
TV: 0
Radio: 0
Data: 0
≥If the signal is too strong, the display will change from grey to red.
Reduce the signal amplification at your aerial.
≥When the signal is weak:
– check that the aerial is correctly positioned.
– adjust the aerial reception with “DVB Manual Tuning” in the Setup
menu (> left).
– check that the current digital broadcast channel is correctly
broadcasting.
– check that your aerial is capable of receiving DVB broadcasts.
START SCAN
RETURN
CH
1
2
Press [3, 4] to select the channel you want to set.
– Select the channel by checking the signal strength and signal
quality displays. [Refer to “Signal Condition” (> right) for signal
strength and signal quality.]
Press [OK] to start scan.
DVB Manual Tuning
The set channel is displayed in
Frequency
[CH54]
738,0 MHz
10
10
Signal Quality
Signal Strength
0
0
the table.
≥Repeat steps 1–2 to tune
other channels.
No.
Channel Name
Type
TV
TV
New
DVB Preferred Multi Audio
1
2
3
4
5
BBC ONE Wales
BBC 2W
-
-
-
-
-
Choose the audio language for digital broadcast.
If the selected language is not available, then the original language
will be selected.
BBC NEWS 24
BBC Radio Wales
ITV
TV
Radio
TV
TV: 15
Radio: 4
Data: 0
[English]
[Welsh]
[Gaelic]
8 DVB channels found.
START SCAN
RETURN
CH
DVB Preferred Subtitles
Choose the subtitle language for digital broadcast.
If the selected language is not available, then the original language
will be selected.
3
Press [EXIT], then press [W X CH] to check that applicable
channels have been selected.
[English]
[Welsh]
[Gaelic]
Add New DVB Channels
[English for hearing impaired]
[Welsh for hearing impaired]
[Gaelic for hearing impaired]
You can search for newly added digital terrestrial channels to
receive.
Favourites Edit
Setup
DVB Auto Setup by Signal Quality
DVB Auto Setup by Region
DVB Manual Tuning
Add New DVB Channels
Signal Condition
Add New DVB Channels
CH 21
Tuning
Disc
Scan
CH
68
Picture
Sound
Display
Connection
VHS
Channel Name
Type Quality
27
27
27
BBC ONE Wales
BBC 2W
TV
TV
9
9
9
DVB Preferred Multi Audio Eng
DVB Preferred Subtitles
Eng
BBC NEWS 24
TV
27
BBC Radio Wales
Radio
9
TAB
SELECT
Others
RETURN
OK
TV: 15
Radio: 4
Data: 0
Searching...
RETURN
– The unit starts searching for newly available digital terrestrial
channels. This takes about 5 minutes.
– The bar over the table shows you the search progress. At the
end of the search, the number of found new digital stations
appears.
– “No new DVB channels found.” is displayed when no new
channels can be found.
Press [OK] to save the newly found channels.
Tips
To cancel in middle
Press [RETURN ].
The channels found before stopping are not saved.
67
VQT2J51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback/Recording and Picture Settings
Settings for Recording
≥Press [OK] to show the following settings.
>
Others
>
Setup
Recording time in EP mode
Select the maximum number of hours for recording in EP mode.
[EP ( 6 hours )]
You can record for 6 hours on an unused 4.7 GB
disc.
[EP ( 8 hours )]
You can record for 8 hours on an unused 4.7 GB
disc.
(> 66, Accessing the Setup Menu)
All factory default settings are indicated with “Underlined” text.
Chapter Creation
Set the automatic Chapter Creation method. (> 52)
Disc
[Automatic]
[Off]
[5 minutes]
No chapter start points are set.
3, 4 select “Disc” > 1 > 3, 4 select item >
OK
Picture
Setup
Settings for Playback
3, 4 select “Picture” > 1 > 3, 4 select item >
Settings for Recording
Tuning
OK
Disc
Picture
Sound
Display
Connection
VHS
Others
Setup
Comb Filter
Still Mode
Seamless Play
Off
Automatic
On
SELECT
TAB
Tuning
RETURN
Disc
Picture
Sound
Display
Settings for Playback
Press [OK] to show the following settings.
Connection
VHS
SELECT
TAB
RETURN
Ratings
Others
Set a ratings level to limit DVD-Video play.
Follow the on-screen instructions. Enter a 4-digit PIN with the
numbered buttons when the PIN screen is shown.
Do not forget your PIN.
Comb Filter
Select the picture sharpness when recording.
The setting is fixed with “On” if you set “TV System” to “NTSC”. (> 70)
≥Setting ratings (When level 8 is selected)
[On]
Select it to record clear picture when “Off” is selected, the
picture is not clear.
[8 No Limit]
[1] to [7]
All DVD-Video can be played.
[Off]
Normally, use this setting.
Prohibits play of DVD-Video with corresponding
ratings recorded on them.
Still Mode
[0 Lock All]
Prohibits play of all DVD-Video.
Select the type of picture shown when you pause play (> 92, Frame
≥Changing settings (When level 0 to 7 is selected)
and Field).
[Unlock Recorder]
[Change Level]
[Change PIN]
[Automatic]
[Temporary Unlock]
[Field]
Select if jittering occurs when “Automatic” is
selected.
Soundtrack
[Frame]
Select if you cannot see small text or fine patterns
clearly when “Automatic” is selected.
[English]
[German]
[French]
[Italian]
[French]
[Italian]
[Spanish]
[Original]
[Other¢¢¢¢]
Seamless Play
Select the play mode between playlist chapter segments and partially
deleted titles.
Subtitles
[Automatic]
[Italian]
[English]
[German]
[On] The chapters in playlists are played seamlessly. This does not
work when there are several audio types included on the
playlist and when using Quick View (> 38). Additionally, the
positioning of chapter segments may change slightly.
[Spanish]
[Other¢¢¢¢]
Menus
[English]
[Spanish]
[German]
[French]
[Off] The points where chapters in playlists change are played
accurately, but the picture may freeze for a moment.
[Other¢¢¢¢]
Notes
[DVD-V] Choose the language for audio, subtitles and disc menus. If a
language which is not recorded is selected, or if languages are
already fixed on the disc, the language set as the default on the disc
will be played instead.
[Original]
The original language of each disc will be selected.
[Other¢¢¢¢]
This is the language code setting. Input a code
number with the numbered buttons (> 82,
Language code list).
[Automatic]
If the language selected for “Soundtrack” is not
available, subtitles of that language will
automatically appear if available on the disc.
68
VQT2J51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sound and Display Settings
Audio Mode for XP Recording
Choose the audio type when recording or copying with XP mode.
Others
Setup
>
>
[Dolby Digital] (> 92) [LPCM] (> 92)
≥The picture quality of LPCM recordings may be lower than that of
normal XP mode recordings.
≥The audio recording becomes Dolby Digital even if you selected
LPCM when using a recording mode other than XP.
§
Incorrect settings can cause noise to be output which can be harmful
to your ears and speakers, and audio will not be recorded properly
on media such as mini discs.
(> 66, Accessing the Setup Menu)
All factory default settings are indicated with “Underlined” text.
Refer to the operating instructions for connected devices to verify
whether or not they can decode each of the audio formats.
Sound
3, 4 select “Sound” > 1 > 3, 4 select item >
Display
OK
3, 4 select “Display” > 1 > 3, 4 select item >
OK
Setup
Dynamic Range Compression
Digital Audio Output
Off
Tuning
Disc
Picture
Sound
Display
Audio Mode for XP Recording Dolby Digital
Setup
On-Screen Messages 5 sec.
Unit’s Display
New Channel Message Automatic
Bright
Tuning
Disc
Screen Saver
On
Off
Connection
VHS
Others
Picture
Sound
Display
Connection
VHS
SELECT
TAB
FUNCTION MENU Display
RETURN
SELECT
TAB
Dynamic Range Compression
[DVD-V] (Dolby Digital only)
RETURN
Others
Change the dynamic range (> 92) for easier listening in low volume.
On-Screen Messages
[On]
[Off]
Choose the approximate time until the digital channel information
screen (> 48) disappears automatically.
Digital Audio Output
The length of time the Control Panel (> 47) is displayed can also be
changed, but “Off” does not work.
Change the settings when you have connected equipment through the
unit’s Digital Audio Out terminal (> 76).
[Off]
The digital channel information is not displayed.
[5 sec.] [7 sec.] [10 sec.]
Press [OK] to show the following settings.
[3 sec.]
PCM Down Conversion
Select how to output audio with a sampling frequency of 96kHz.
Signals are converted to 48 kHz despite the above settings if the
signals have a sampling frequency of over 96 kHz, or the disc has
copy protection.
Unit’s Display
Changes the brightness of the unit’s display.
Regardless of the setting, when “Power Save in Standby” (> 72) is
activated and this unit is turned off, the unit’s display is turned off.
[On] Signals are converted to 48 kHz. (Choose when the
connected equipment cannot process signals with sampling
frequency of 96 kHz.)
[Bright]
[Dim]
New Channel Message
Set whether to display the confirmation message when a DVB
channel is added.
[Off] Signals are output as 96 kHz. (Choose when the connected
equipment can process signals with sampling frequency of
96 kHz.)
[Automatic]
When a new DVB channel is added the unit will be
informed automatically.
Dolby Digital§
Choose whether to output by “Bitstream”, which processes Dolby
Digital signals on other connected equipment, or to convert the
signals to “PCM” (2ch) on the unit before output.
[Off]
The Channel Messages are not shown.
Screen Saver
[On]
When this unit is not operated for approximately 5 minutes
while the screen is being displayed, the screen saver is
displayed. To return to the previous screen, press [OK].
[Bitstream]
When connected to equipment with a built-in Dolby
Digital decoder.
[PCM]
When connected to equipment without a built-in Dolby
Digital decoder.
[Off]
DTS§
FUNCTION MENU Display
[On] When the unit is turned on, the FUNCTION MENU will be
Choose whether to output by “Bitstream”, which processes DTS
signals on other connected equipment or to convert the signals to
“PCM” (2ch) on the unit before output.
displayed. (> 45)
[Off]
[Bitstream]
When connected to equipment with a built-in DTS
decoder.
[PCM]
When connected to equipment without a built-in DTS
decoder.
MPEG§
Choose whether to output by “Bitstream”, which processes MPEG
audio signals on other connected equipment or to convert the
signals to “PCM” (2ch) on the unit before output.
[Bitstream]
When connected to equipment with a built-in MPEG
decoder.
[PCM]
When connected to equipment without a built-in
MPEG decoder.
69
VQT2J51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connection Settings
HDMI Settings§1
≥Press [OK] to show the following settings.
Others
Setup
>
>
HDMI Video Format§2
You can only select items compatible with the connected equipment.
If you are concerned about output picture quality, it may be improved
by changing the setting.
– To enjoy High Quality Video up-converted to 1080p, you need to
connect the unit directly to 1080p compatible HDTV. If this unit is
connected to an HDTV through other equipment, it must also be
1080p compatible.
(> 66, Accessing the Setup Menu)
All factory default settings are indicated with “Underlined” text.
[576i/480i]
[1080p]
[576p/480p]
[720p]
[1080i]
Connection
When setting video output to “1080p”, we
recommend using High Speed HDMI Cables that
have the HDMI logo (as shown on the cover) and are
less than 5 meters to prevent video distortion etc.
3
,
4
select “Connection”
>
1
>
3
,
4
select item
>
OK
[Automatic]
Automatically selects the output resolution best
suited to the connected television (1080p, 1080i,
720p, 576p/480p or 576i/480i).
Setup
TV Aspect
16:9
PAL
TV System
Tuning
HDMI Settings
AV 1 Output
AV 2 Settings
Disc
Aspect for 4:3 Video
Video
Picture
Sound
Display
To play a 4:3 title when connected with an HDMI cable, set how to
show pictures on a 16:9 widescreen television. 4:3 picture from
HDMI output will be slightly smaller than that from the other outputs,
e.g. Scart, this is not a malfunction of the unit.
Connection
VHS
Others
SELECT
TAB
RETURN
[4:3]
Picture output expands left or right.
TV Aspect
This setting needs to be changed when connected to a 4:3 standard
aspect TV.
[16:9]
Picture is output as original aspect with side
panels.
[16:9]
[4:3]
[Letterbox]
Digital Audio Output
[HDMI and Optical]
Notes
Aspect 4:3/16:9
[Optical Only]
Select when this unit is connected to an
amplifier with an optical digital audio cable
(> 76) and connected to a TV with an HDMI
cable (> 77) and you want to enjoy the
highest quality of audio from discs.
4:3
16:9
16:9 widescreen television
4:3 standard aspect television
When connected to a 16:9 widescreen television.
≥ [16:9]:
VIERA Link
When connected to a 4:3 aspect
television, side picture is trimmed for
16:9 picture (> 92, Pan & Scan).
≥ [4:3]:
[On]
[Off]
Select when you do not want to use “HDAVI Control”.
When connected to a 4:3 aspect
television, widescreen picture is
shown in the letterbox style (> 92).
≥
[Letterbox]:
TV System
Change this setting if you connect an NTSC television or to record
NTSC video from another source.
1. Press [3, 4] to select the TV System, then press
[OK].
[PAL]
– Select when connecting to a PAL or Multi-system television.
Programmes recorded using NTSC are played as PAL 60.
– Select to record television programmes and PAL input from
other equipment.
[NTSC]
– Select when connecting to an NTSC television.
Television programmes cannot be recorded properly.
– Select to record NTSC input from other equipment.
The confirmation screen appears.
2. Press [2] to select “Yes”, then press [OK].
Tips
To change the setting all at once (PAL/NTSC)
While stopped, press and hold [∫] and [< OPEN/CLOSE] on the
main unit simultaneously for about 5 seconds.
Notes
≥This unit cannot record NTSC signals to discs that already have
PAL signal recordings.
If “NTSC” has been selected, the TV Guide system cannot be used.
≥
≥During recording, timer recording standby or EXT LINK standby,
this unit cannot play discs that do not match the “TV System” (PAL/
NTSC) setting. Set “TV System” to match the discs before playing
them. Change back the setting after playback of disc, otherwise
recording may not be done properly.
70
VQT2J51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
VHS Settings
AV1 Output
Set according to the terminal of the connected TV.
Others
Setup
>
>
[Video]
Select when a TV that can receive a composite signal is
connected.
[RGB 1]
Select when a TV that can receive an RGB signal is connected. If
you always would like to view the picture from the unit in RGB
signal, select this mode. The TV screen will automatically switch to
display the picture from the unit when the unit is turned on.
(> 66, Accessing the Setup Menu)
All factory default settings are indicated with “Underlined”
text.
[RGB 2]
Select when a TV that can receive an RGB signal is connected. If
you would like to switch to display the picture from the unit only
when playback or viewing menus, select this mode.
VHS
≥If this unit is connected with an HDMI cable, you cannot select
“RGB 1” or “RGB 2”.
3, 4 select “VHS” > 1 > 3, 4 select item >
OK
AV2 Settings
Set to match the connected equipment.
≥Press [OK] to show the following settings.
Setup
Tape Length
SQPB
Auto (E-240)
Automatic
Tuning
Disc
AV2 Input
Picture
Sound
Display
Connection
VHS
Set to “RGB / Video” or “RGB” when receiving or recording RGB
output from external equipment.
[RGB / Video] The unit automatically detects whether the input
signal from the AV2 terminal is an RGB signal or
other signals and makes settings.
SELECT
TAB
RETURN
Others
[RGB]
Tape Length
Set the length of the tape you are using so the unit can show the
correct remaining time.
[Video]
[S Video]
[Auto (E-240)]
The unit automatically distinguishes E30, -60, -90,
-120, -180, and -240 tapes.
Ext Link
[Ext Link 1] When this unit is connected to a digital satellite
receiver with a 21-spin Scart cable and this unit
receives a control signal.
[E-195]
[E-260]
[E-300]
For E195 tape
For E260 tape
For E300 tape
Start and stop timings of recording are controlled
by the control signal.
[Ext Link 2] When external equipment with a timer function is
connected.
SQPB
To play back video cassettes recorded in S-VHS format (SQPB; S-
VHS Quasi Playback)
Recording is continued while the image signal is
being sent to the unit from the external equipment.
Recording is stopped when the image signal is
halted by turning the external equipment off.
[Automatic]
This unit automatically detects the format in which
the recording was made and selects the same format
for playback. However, picture distortion may occur.
Therefore, set to “On” or “Off”.
§1
Depending on the connected equipment, some items may be
shaded in grey on the display and cannot be selected, or you
may not be able to change the settings.
[On]
[Off]
Use this setting when playing back a cassette tape
recorded in the S-VHS format.
§2
Choose the setting to suit your TV and preference.
Use this setting when playing back a cassette tape
recorded in the VHS format only.
71
VQT2J51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Settings
Standby Settings
≥Press [OK] to show the following settings.
>
Others
>
Setup
Power Save in Standby
[On]
It will go into the Power Save in Standby mode
when the unit is in standby mode.
[On Timer]
[Off]
“Power Save in Standby” is set to activate
during the setting time period. (> below)
(> 66, Accessing the Setup Menu)
All factory default settings are indicated with “Underlined” text.
It is possible to start quickly from the standby
mode. (Quick Start mode)
Others
1 Press [3, 4] to select “On Timer” and press [OK].
Power Save in Standby
3, 4 select “Others” > 1 > 3, 4 select item >
OK
Power Save
On Timer
To
:00
Setup
From
0
:00
6
Remote Control
Clock
Owner ID
Standby Settings
System Update
Initialize
DVD 1
Number
Saves standby power consumption
by disabling Quick Start function and
AV2 loop-through in standby.
Press OK to manually set the period of
Power Save.
Tuning
0
9
Disc
CHANGE
SELECT
Picture
Sound
Display
OK
RETURN
2 Press [3, 4] to set the start time (hour).
3 Press [2, 1] to select the stop time and press
[3, 4] to set the stop time (hour).
Connection
VHS
Others
SELECT
TAB
RETURN
4 Press [OK] when you have finished the settings.
Remote Control (> 82)
≥You can also use the numbered buttons for setting.
≥You can set start and stop time by the hour.
≥If the clock has not been set, “Power Save in Standby” is
activated at all hours.
[DVD 1]
[DVD 2]
[DVD 3]
Clock (> 14)
Owner ID (> 13)
In order to prevent another person from using this unit if it is stolen,
you can set a PIN number and input your personal information.
Once the PIN number has been set, you cannot return to the factory
preset. Make sure not to forget this.
Auto Standby
Set the time to automatically turn the unit off.
After the unit has finished operating, the unit will be turned off
once the set time has passed.
[30 minutes]
[6 hours]
[Off]
[1 hour]
[2 hours]
[4 hours]
≥PIN number
≥Name
≥House No.
≥Postcode
The unit will not automatically turn off.
Auto Standby after OTR
[On] This unit is turned to standby mode when this unit is not
operated for approximately 5 minutes after completing
One Touch Recording (> 29).
[Off]
Auto Standby after Copy
[On] This unit is turned to standby mode when this unit is not
operated for approximately 5 minutes after completing
copy (> 57-61).
[Off]
RF OUT ( Aerial Signal )
[On] Broadcast signals are output from this unit.
TV can receive broadcast signals even if this unit is in
standby mode when connecting TV with this unit using
the RF cable (> 10).
[Off] Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” when the confirmation
message is displayed.
Broadcast signals are not output from this unit to reduce
standby power consumption.
≥Power consumption is lowered additionally when
“Power Save in Standby” is activated.
≥If this unit turns into standby mode when connecting TV
with this unit using the RF cable, proper broadcast
images do not appear on TV.
72
VQT2J51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Update
In order to update this unit, the TV Guide download, and support
system changes made by broadcasts, this unit periodically performs
software updates.
≥Press [OK] to show the following settings.
≥Update data and TV Guide download information are sent by an
unscheduled digital broadcast. In order to receive these updates,
you must be able to receive digital broadcasts.
≥An update will take approximately 60 minutes. While the update is in
progress, “SW-DL” appears on the unit’s display.
You cannot operate the unit until the update is complete.
Removing the AC mains lead while the update is in progress may
damage the unit.
≥TV Guide download will take approximately 30 minutes.
While the TV Guide download is in progress, “GUIDE” appears on
the unit’s display. The TV Guide download can be interrupted by
switching on the unit.
≥To avoid hearing the startup sound of System Update for the unit,
perform the following steps.
– Select the time for Software Update (> below, TV Guide/Software
search period).
– Set “TV Guide Download in Standby” and “Software Update in
Standby” (> below) to “Off”, and update manually (> below,
Software Update Search Now).
TV Guide Download in Standby
[On]
When the unit is turned off, TV Guide data is downloaded
automatically.
[Off]
Software Update in Standby
[On]
You can perform the unit updates automatically when the
unit is turned off.
[Off]
TV Guide/Software search period
Selects the time to automatically perform TV Guide download and
updates when the unit is turned off. This can only be set when “TV
Guide Download in Standby” or “Software Update in Standby” is set
to “On”.
≥If there is a programmed recording set for the time you have
selected, the programmed recording will be given priority.
When the GUIDE Plus+ system is not available
[Automatic]
The unit will give priority to searching for update
data at midnight.
[02:00–06:00]
[14:00–18:00]
[06:00–10:00]
[18:00–22:00]
[10:00–14:00]
[22:00–02:00]
When the GUIDE Plus+ system is available
[Automatic]
[Daytime]
Updating is executed during daytime (06:00–
22:00).
Software Update Search Now
Start the search for new software manually.
A new software version is announced by a message. Do not turn this
unit off during the update. This could result in the loss of data. A
message shows that the update has finished.
≥If applicable update data is found, press [2, 1] to select “Yes”,
then press [OK].
GUIDE Plus+ System Information
You can check the condition of GUIDE Plus+ system of this unit.
Post Code
You can input the postal code which is necessary to download area
specific information of GUIDE Plus+ system.
Initialize
≥Press [OK] to show the following settings.
Shipping Condition
This returns Setup menus to default settings, except for the ratings
level, ratings PIN, Slideshow Settings, Owner ID and clock settings, etc.
[Yes]
[No]
≥The timer recording programmes are also cancelled.
Default Settings
This returns Setup menus to default settings, except for the tuning
settings, clock settings, disc language settings, ratings level, ratings
PIN, Slideshow Settings, Owner ID and remote control code, etc.
[Yes]
[No]
≥The timer recording programmes are also cancelled.
73
VQT2J51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Other
Setting
s
Other Settings
Manufacturer
FUJITSU
Code No.
Child Lock
The Child Lock deactivates all buttons on the unit and remote
control. Use it to prevent other people from operating the unit.
53
FUNAI
63/67
GOLDSTAR
GOODMANS
GRADIENTE
GRUNDIG
HIKONA
HITACHI
INNO HIT
IRRADIO
ITT
05/50/51
Press and hold [OK] and [RETURN ] at the same time
until “X HOLD” appears on the unit’s display.
05
36
09
52
If you press a button while the Child Lock is on, “X HOLD”
appears on the unit’s display and operation is impossible.
05/22/23/40/41
05
30
Tips
25
To cancel the Child Lock
JINGXING
JVC
49
Press and hold [OK] and [RETURN ] at the same time until
“X HOLD” disappears.
17/30/39/70
KDS
52
KOLIN
45
Using the Unit’s Remote Control to
Operate the TV
You can configure the remote control TV operation buttons to
turn the television on/off, change the television input mode,
select the television channel and change the television volume.
KONKA
LG
62
05/50/51
LOEWE
MAG
07/46
52
METZ
05/28
MITSUBISHI
MIVAR
05/19/20/47
24
Volume
NEC
36
TV
Turn TV
NOBLEX
NOKIA
33
on/off
VOL
25/26/27/60/61
DRIVE
CH
Channel
Select
SELECT
NORDMENDE
OLEVIA
ONWA
10
Input
AV
45
select
TRACKING/V-LOCK/PAGE
30/39/70
ORION
05
1 Point the remote control at the TV.
PEONY
PHILCO
PHILIPS
PHONOLA
PIONEER
PROVIEW
PYE
49/69
2 While pressing and holding [Í TV], enter the code
from the table below using the numbered buttons.
e.g., 01: press [0] > [1]
41/48/64
05/06/46
3
Test the TV functions of the remote control for operability.
– If the functions do not work, repeat steps 1 to 3 using
different codes, if available. Some TVs may not be
compatible with the unit’s remote control.
05
37/38
52
05
Remote Control Codes for the TV
Manufacturer
RADIOLA
SABA
05
Code No.
10
Panasonic
AIWA
01/02/03/04
SALORA
SAMSUNG
SANSUI
SANYO
26
35
32/42/43/65/68
05
AKAI
27/30
BEJING
BEKO
33
21/54/55/56
05/29/30
05/71/72/73/74
SCHNEIDER
SEG
BENQ
58/59
09
05/69/75/76/77/78
BP
SELECO
SHARP
05/25
BRANDT
BUSH
10/15
05
18
SIEMENS
SINUDYNE
SONY
09
CENTREX
CHANGHONG
CURTIS
DAEWOO
DESMET
DUAL
66
05
69
08
05
TCL
31/33/66/67/69
10/11/12/13/14
52
64/65
05
TELEFUNKEN
TEVION
TEX ONDA
THOMSON
TOSHIBA
05
52
ELEMIS
FERGUSON
FINLUX
FISHER
05
10/15/44
16/57
10/34
61
WHITE WESTINGHOUSE 05
21
YAMAHA
18/41
74
VQT2J51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Refere
nce
Additional Connections
Using a fully wired 21-pin Scart cable
– You can use a variety of Q Link functions by connecting the unit to a Q Link compatible television (> 46).
– You can enjoy high-quality viewing by connecting the unit to an RGB compatible television.
“AV1 Output” in the Setup menu is set to “RGB 1” or “RGB 2” (> 71).
Make “AV2 Input” settings in the Setup menu (> 71).
Use of the RF coaxial cable
≥ Keep the RF coaxial cables as far away as possible from other cables.
≥ Do not roll up the RF coaxial cables.
DVD output and DVD/VHS output
The unit has DVD/VHS common out terminals and DVD priority out terminals.
≥ The DVD priority out terminals can also output the VHS signal.
However this is not possible during DVD recording or DVD timer recording.
DVD/VHS common out
RF
IN
RF
OUT
OPTICAL
R-AUDIO-L VIDEO
OUT
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
(PCM/BITSTREAM)
AV2 (EXT)
AV1 (TV)
DVD priority out
≥ Before connection, turn off the mains for all connected equipment and read the appropriate operating
instructions.
Connect AC mains lead only after all other connections are complete.
BE SURE TO READ THE CAUTION FOR AC MAINS LEAD ON PAGE 3.
Adding a VCR: Connecting to a Television and a Video Cassette Recorder
TV
RF coaxial cable
21-pin Scart cable
HDMI cable
To the aerial
AV
You can enjoy
high-quality
HDMI IN
RF IN
picture by adding
the HDMI cable
connection (> 12)
This unit
RF IN
HDMI AV
OUT
RF OUT
AV2 (EXT) AV1(TV)
RF IN
RF OUT
AV
The RF coaxial cable (included)
cannot be used for showing
pictures from the unit. The unit
must be connected using another
method, e.g. 21-pin Scart cable to
show pictures from the unit
on the television set.
VCR
To record from a VCR
Refer to “Recording from an External Device” (> 32).
75
VQT2J51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional Connections
Connecting to a Television with Audio/
Video Cable (not included)
≥ You can connect this unit to a TV using the audio/video
(AV) cable, instead of the HDMI cable or 21-pin Scart
cable (> 10, 11, 75).
≥ Using a Scart or HDMI cable gives a higher quality
picture than this connection.
≥ Connect to terminals of the same colour.
Adding an Amplifer or Receiver
You can improve sound quality by connecting this unit to
an amplifier or system component using the audio cable
or the optical digital audio cable.
Using an Audio Cable (not included)
It is possible to output 2-channel stereo sound.
≥ Connect to terminals of the same colour.
TV
AUDIO IN
R
L
Amplifier
or
System Component
AUDIO IN
VIDEO
IN
R
L
This unit
This unit
L
R
AUDIO
OUT
R
L
OUT
AUDIO
VIDEO
Using an Optical Digital Audio Cable (not included)
It is possible to output multi-channel surround sound on
DVD-Video.
Amplifier or System Component
OPTICAL IN
Insert fully with this side up.
Do not bend cable sharply.
This unit
OPTICAL
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
(PCM/BITSTREAM)
≥ Connect an amplifier or system component with a built-
in Dolby Digital, DTS or MPEG decoder.
≥ Adjust settings in “Digital Audio Output” (> 69) as
needed, depending on other connection and the
amplifier or receiver.
Notes
≥When this unit is connected to an amplifier with an optical digital
audio cable and connected to a television with an HDMI cable, you
can enjoy the highest quality of audio from the disc by setting
“Digital Audio Output” to “Optical Only” in the Setup menu (> 70).
In this case audio is only output from the amplifier not the television.
≥You cannot use DTS Digital Surround decoders not meant for DVD.
≥Before purchasing an optical digital audio cable, check the terminal
shape of the equipment to be connected.
76
VQT2J51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting with an HDMI (High Definition Multimedia
Interface) Terminal
When connected to an HDMI compatible unit, an
uncompressed digital audio and video signal is
transmitted, enabling you to enjoy high quality, digital
video and audio with just one cable. When connecting to
an HDMI-compatible HDTV (High Definition Television),
the output can be switched to 1080p, 1080i or 720p HD
video.
≥ Please use High Speed HDMI Cables that have the
HDMI logo (as shown on the cover).
≥ When setting video output to “1080p”, please use the
HDMI cables 5.0 meters or less.
Regarding VIERA Link “HDAVI ControlTM”
function
When connecting with a Panasonic TV (VIERA) or a
receiver equipped with the “HDAVI Control” function,
linked operations would be possible. [> 46, Linked
Operations with the TV (VIERA Link “HDAVI
ControlTM”/Q Link)]
≥ It is recommended that you use Panasonic’s HDMI
cable.
Recommended part number: RP-CDHS15 (1.5 m),
RP-CDHS30 (3.0 m), RP-CDHS50 (5.0 m), etc.
≥ Non-HDMI-compliant cables cannot be utilised.
Using an HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface)
Cable (not included)
Receiver
TV
HDMI IN
HDMI OUT
HDMI IN
AV
HDMI AV OUT
AV1(TV)
This unit
Connecting with a Panasonic TV (VIERA)
If the 21-pin Scart cable is connected, the following
functions are available.
≥ Direct TV Recording (> 29)
≥ Set “Digital Audio Output” to “HDMI and Optical” (> 70).
(The default setting is “HDMI and Optical”.)
Notes
≥If connecting to equipment that is only compatible with 2 channel
audio output, audio with 3 channels or more will be down-mixed
(> 92) and output as 2 channels, even if connecting with an HDMI
cable (some discs cannot be down-mixed).
≥You cannot connect this unit to DVI devices that are incompatible
with HDCP.
For display units compatible with HDCP (High-Bandwidth Digital
Content Protection) that are equipped with a digital DVI input
terminal (PC monitors, etc.):
Depending on the unit, picture may not be displayed properly or at
all when connecting with a DVI/HDMI switching cable (audio cannot
be output).
77
VQT2J51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Frequently Asked Questions
Setup
DVB-T
How can I enjoy High Quality Video up-converted to
1080p?
Which aerial is suitable for receiving digital
terrestrial broadcasts?
¾ Connect the unit to 1080p compatible HDTV using an
¾ Any (terrestrial) roof aerial can be used. However,
depending on the area where you live, a new aerial may be
necessary. Consult your local TV aerial installer.
HDMI cable.
Set “HDMI Video Format” in the Setup menu to “1080p”.
(> 12, 70)
Can this unit receive or record High Definition (HD)
broadcasts?
What equipment is necessary to play multi-channel
surround sound?
¾ You cannot playback multi-channel sound on this unit
without other equipment. You must connect this unit with an
HDMI cable or an optical digital cable to an amplifier with a
built-in (Dolby Digital, DTS or MPEG) decoder and multi-
channel speakers. (> 76)
¾ No, this unit cannot receive or record High Definition (HD)
broadcasts.
GUIDE Plus+
Is it possible to programme a recording, with a start
and end time that are different from the GUIDE
Plus+ system?
Can the headphones and speakers be directly
connected to the unit?
¾ You cannot directly connect to the unit. Connect through
¾ You can manually change the start and end time of
programmes in the Timer Recording menu.
the amplifier, TV, etc. (> 76)
But if timings are altered by more than 10 minutes, “Guide
Link” will not be able to function. (> 23)
Is my TV compatible with progressive output?
¾ All Panasonic televisions that have 625 (576)/50i · 50p, 525
(480)/60i · 60p input terminals are compatible. Consult the
manufacturer if you have another brand of TV.
Can I receive GUIDE Plus+ system data via a
connected digital satellite receiver or a Set Top
Box?
¾ No, only via the built-in tuner. To perform timer recordings
with digital satellite receivers or Set Top Boxes, please use
the External Link feature or your unit’s manual timer
programming. (> 31, 33)
Discs
Can I play DVD-Video, and Video CDs bought in
another country?
¾ You cannot play DVD-Video if their region number does not
include “2” or “ALL”. Refer to the disc’s jacket for more
information. (> Cover)
How can I cancel a timer programming?
¾ Press [PROG/CHECK] and select the desired entry and
then press [DELETE ¢]. (> 34)
Can a DVD-Video that does not have a region
number be played?
What happens when I unplug my unit from the
household mains socket?
¾ Discs either without region encoding or region code 2 will
¾ The GUIDE Plus+ system data will not be updated. If the
unit is disconnected from the AC mains for a longer period
of time, then the GUIDE Plus+ data is lost.
Display the GUIDE Plus+ screen. (> 19, steps 1–2) The
GUIDE Plus+ system data will then be automatically
updated.
not play on this unit.
Please tell me about disc compatibility with this
unit.
¾ This unit records and plays DVD-RAM, DVD-R, DVD-R DL,
DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW, and
plays DVD-RW (DVD Video Recording format). (> 15, 16)
¾ This unit also records and plays high speed recording
compatible discs. (> 91)
¾ After recording but before finalising DVD-R, DVD-R DL,
DVD-RW, +R and +R DL.
– You may not be able to play and record discs on this unit
after recording them on other Panasonic products or
other manufacturers’ equipment.
– You may not be able to play and record discs on other
equipment after recording them on this unit.
After finalising the disc, however, you will be able to play it
on any DVD-Video compatible player.
Please tell me about CD-R and CD-RW compatibility
with this unit.
¾ This unit plays CD-R/CD-RW discs which have been
recorded in one of the following standards:
CD-DA, Video CD, SVCD (conforming to IEC62107), MP3
and still pictures (JPEG). Close the session or finalise the
disc after recording. This unit can recognize up to 300
folders (groups or albums) and 3000 files (tracks) on a disc
with MP3 or still pictures (JPEG). (> 16, 18)
¾ You cannot write to a CD-R or CD-RW with the unit.
78
VQT2J51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording
Can I record from a commercially purchased video
cassette or DVD?
¾ Most commercially sold video cassettes and DVDs are
copy protected; therefore, recording is usually not possible.
Can DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video
format), +R, +R DL, and +RW recorded on the unit
be played on other equipment?
¾ You can play these discs on compatible equipment such as
DVD players after finalising the disc on this unit.
[+RW] It is not necessary to finalise +RW. To enable play on
other DVD players, please use “Create Top Menu” in the
DVD Management menu. (> 65)
¾ In any case, ability to play a disc depends on the condition
of the recording, the quality of the disc, and the capability
and format constraints of the DVD player.
¾ If you play a DVD-R DL, +R DL or +RW, use compatible
equipment. Not all equipment will play those discs.
Can a digital audio signal from the unit be recorded
to other equipment?
¾ You can record if using the PCM signal. When recording
DVD, change the “Digital Audio Output” settings to the
following via the Setup menu:
– PCM Down Conversion: “On”
– Dolby Digital: “PCM”
– DTS: “PCM”
– MPEG: “PCM”
However, only
– As long as digital recording from the disc is permitted.
– As long as the recording equipment is compatible with
48 kHz sampling frequency. (> 69)
¾ You cannot record MP3 signals.
USB
What can or cannot be done using the USB port on
this unit?
¾ You can play MP3 or still picture (JPEG) files on a USB
memory. (> 42)
¾ You can copy still pictures (JPEG) files on a USB memory
to DVD-RAM. (> 60)
¾ Data on a disc cannot be transferred to a USB memory.
¾ Data on a USB memory cannot be edited or a USB memory
cannot be formatted on this unit.
¾ Some USB memories cannot be used with this unit. (> 17)
¾ This unit cannot be connected to a computer and it cannot
record to an external device. i.e. an external hard drive via
the USB port.
79
VQT2J51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Messages
On the Unit’s Display
H∑∑, F∑∑
(“∑” stands for a service number.)
≥ An error has occurred. The number following “H” or “F” depends on the status
of the unit. Check the items below and in the Troubleshooting Guide. If the
service number still does not disappear after the check, reset the unit (> 82, To
restore the unit if it freezes).
≥ If the service numbers fail to clear, note the service numbers and contact a
qualified service person.
DVD ∑
(“∑” stands for a number.)
≥ The remote control and the main unit are using different codes. Change the
code on the remote control. (> 82)
GUIDE
≥ GUIDE Plus+ data is being downloaded. (> 73)
HARD ERR§
≥ If there is no change after turning the unit on and off, consult the dealer where
the unit was purchased.
NoCASSETTE§
NoERAS
≥ You have not inserted a video cassette for the recording. (> 7)
≥ You cannot delete items on this disc.
≥ The disc may be damaged. Use a new disc.
NoREAD
≥ The disc is dirty or badly scratched. The unit cannot record, play, or edit. (> 7)
≥ The disc may be incompatible or of poor quality. (> 15, 16)
≥ You have used a lens cleaner and it has finished operation. Press [< OPEN/
CLOSE] on the main unit to eject the disc. (> 6)
NoWRIT
≥ You cannot write to this disc.
The disc may be damaged. Use a new disc.
FINAL
≥ When the screen asking if you want to finalise the disc appears, the message is
displayed. (> 29)
PLEASE WAIT§
≥ Displayed when the unit is started. This is not a malfunction.
≥ The unit is carrying out its recovery process. You cannot operate the unit while
the message is displayed.
PROG FULL§
PROTECT§
REMOVE
≥ There are already 16 timer recording programmes. Delete unnecessary timer
recording programmes. (> 34)
≥ You have inserted a video cassette without the accidental erasure prevention
tab. Use a video cassette with an accidental erasure prevention tab. (> 7)
≥ The USB device is drawing too much power. Remove the USB device and turn
the unit off.
SW-DL
≥ The unit is performing a software update. (> 73)
SP 35:50, LP 151h
“SP”, “LP” and the numbers are examples.
≥ Available space on the disc.
The example “SP 35:50” is displayed when less than 100 hours are available
and the example “LP 151h” is displayed when over 100 hours are available.
“SP” and “LP” are recording modes, “35:50” means “35 hours 50 minutes” and
“151h” means “151 hours”.
UNSUPPORT§
UNFORMAT§
≥ You have inserted a disc the unit cannot play or record onto. (> 15, 16)
≥ You tried to operate with a non-compatible USB memory. (> 17)
≥ You inserted an unformatted DVD-RAM, DVD-RW, +RW, an unused +R, +R DL
or DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) that has been recorded on other equipment.
Format the disc to use it.
However all the recorded contents on the disc are deleted. (> 29)
EXT-L
≥ This unit is in EXT LINK standby. EXT LINK has been turned on and will stop
operation on the unit until the recording has completed.
Press [EXT LINK] to stop recording or cancel linked timer. (> 31)
§
The message are alternately displayed.
80
VQT2J51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
On the Unit’s Display (Continued)
F74
≥ The HDMI connection could not be authenticated due to a transfer malfunction.
If you have another HDMI cable, try to use it. If it remains displayed, consult the
dealer where the unit was purchased.
F75
U59
≥ The HDMI connection could not be authenticated due to an internal data
malfunction. If you have another HDMI cable, try to use it. If it remains
displayed, consult the dealer where the unit was purchased.
≥ The unit is hot.
The unit switches to standby for safety reasons. Wait for about 30 minutes until
the message disappears.
Select a position with good ventilation when installing the unit. Do not block the
cooling fan on the rear of the unit.
U61
≥ (When a disc is not inserted) Displays when a malfunction has occurred. This is
displayed when the unit is in the recovery process to return to normal operation.
Once the display disappears you can use the unit again.
If it remains displayed, consult the dealer where the unit was purchased.
U76
≥ HDMI cannot be output because this unit is connected to a model that does not
support copyright protection.
U80, U81, U99
≥ The unit fails to operate properly. Press [Í/I] on the main unit to switch the unit
to standby mode. Press [Í/I] on the main unit again to turn the unit on.
U88
≥
There was something unusual detected with the disc while recording, playing or
copying; there was a power failure or the AC mains lead was disconnected while
the unit was on. The unit is carrying out its recovery process. This process restores
the unit to normal operation. Wait until the message disappears.
If it remains displayed, consult the dealer where the unit was purchased.
X HOLD
≥ The Child Lock function is activated.
Press and hold [OK] and [RETURN ] at the same time until “X HOLD”
disappears. (> 74)
On the TV
Cannot finish recording completely.
Copy-protect signal was detected.
≥ The programme was copy-protected.
Disc is full, or maximum number of titles
are recorded.
≥ The disc may be full.
≥ The maximum number of title has been exceeded. (> 28)
≥ [RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+RW] Create space by erasing unwanted titles.
Even if you erase recorded content from the DVD-R, DVD-R DL, +R or +R DL
there is no increase in disc space. Available recording space on a DVD-RW
(DVD-Video format) or +RW disc increases when the last title is deleted (space
may increase slightly when you delete other titles). (> 26, 50, 64)
≥ Use a new disc.
Cannot finish recording completely.
Cannot record.
Maximum number of titles exceeded.
No cassette.
≥ There is no video cassette in the tape deck when playing or recording TV
programmes. Insert a video cassette. (> 7)
The cassette is write-protected.
≥ A video cassette without a secure accidental erasure prevention tab is inserted
when recording programmes. Use a video cassette with a secure accidental
erasure prevention tab. (> 7)
Cannot playback.
≥ You tried to play a title recorded using a different encoding system from that of
the TV system currently selected on the unit.
Alter the “TV System” setting on this unit to suit. (> 70)
TV system is different from the setting.
To playback, please change the TV System
in Setup.
Cannot play on this unit.
No Disc
≥ You tried to play a non-compatible image. (> 18)
≥
The disc is upside down. If it is a single-sided disc, insert it so the label is facing up.
≥ Ensure the disc is flat in the tray.
Now recording on DVD.
≥ The VHS plays back while recording on DVD. You can watch the VHS playback
by connecting 21-pin Scart cable from AV1 on the unit to the television.
VHS cannot be output via “DVD priority out” while recording to DVD. (> 75)
To watch pictures on VHS, use AV1 socket,
and switch to an appropriate AV channel
on your TV.
This is a non-recordable disc.
Unable to format.
≥ The disc may be dirty or scratched. (> 7)
≥ The unit cannot record on the disc you inserted. Insert a DVD-RAM or
unfinalised DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, R DL or
+RW disc. (> 15)
This disc is not formatted properly.
Format it using DVD Management
in FUNCTION MENU.
≥ You inserted an unformatted DVD-RAM, DVD-RW, +R, +R DL or +RW disc.
Format the disc with the unit. (> 64)
$
≥ The operation is prohibited by the unit, disc or video cassette.
81
VQT2J51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting Guide
When Other Panasonic Products Respond
to this Remote Control
Use this function to synchronize the codes for the remote
control and the main unit when there are other Panasonic
products close to your unit.
To Reset This Unit
To reset the unit’s settings
All the settings except for the ratings level, ratings PIN, Owner
ID, Clock and remote control code, etc. return to the factory
preset. The timer recording programmes are also cancelled.
With the unit stopped
1 Press [FUNCTION MENU].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Others”, then press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Setup”, then press [OK].
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Others”, then press [1].
5 Press [3, 4] to select “Remote Control”, then press
[OK].
When the unit is turned on and stopped.
Press and hold [X CH] and [CH W] on the main unit for
about 5 seconds.
– The Auto-Setup starts automatically. (> 13)
6 Press [3, 4] to select the code (“DVD 1”, “DVD 2” or
“DVD 3”) and press [OK].
To reset the ratings level settings
With the unit is turned on and stopped
1 Press [< OPEN/CLOSE] to open the disc tray.
2 Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.
Remote Control
Setup
Tuning
Press “
” and “OK” together
for more than 5 seconds on the remote
control.
Disc
Picture
Sound
Display
On the main unit
3 Press and hold [¥ REC] and [1] (PLAY) for about
5 seconds.
Connection
VHS
Others
OK
RETURN
To restore the unit if it freezes
7 While pressing and holding [OK], press and hold the
numbered button [1], [2] or [3] corresponding to the
code set in step 6 for more than 5 seconds to set.
8 Press [OK] to complete.
On the main unit
Press and hold [Í/I] for more than 3 seconds.
– The unit is turned off.
When the following indicator appears on the unit’s display
– Change the code on the remote control to match the code
displayed for the main unit (> step 7).
Tips
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
Language code list
Enter the code with the numbered buttons.
Abkhazian:
Afar:
Afrikaans:
Albanian:
Amharic:
Arabic:
Armenian:
Assamese:
Aymara:
Azerbaijani:
Bashkir:
6566 Catalan:
6565 Chinese:
6570 Corsican:
8381 Croatian:
6577 Czech:
6582 Danish:
7289 Dutch:
6583 English:
6589 Esperanto:
6590 Estonian:
6665 Faroese:
6985 Fiji:
6765 Gujarati:
9072 Hausa:
6779 Hebrew:
7282 Hindi:
6783 Hungarian:
6865 Icelandic:
7876 Indonesian:
6978 Interlingua:
6979 Irish:
7185 Lingala:
7265 Lithuanian:
7387 Macedonian:
7273 Malagasy:
7285 Malay:
7383 Malayalam:
7378 Maltese:
7365 Maori:
7165 Marathi:
7384 Moldavian:
7465 Mongolian:
7487 Nauru:
7578 Nepali:
7583 Norwegian:
7575 Oriya:
7589 Pashto, Pushto: 8083 Spanish:
7579 Persian:
7585 Polish:
7678 Rhaeto-Romance:
Tamil:
8465
8484
8469
8472
6679
8473
8479
8482
8475
8487
8575
8582
8590
8673
8679
6789
8779
8872
7473
8979
9085
7684
8277 Tatar:
8279 Telugu:
8285 Thai:
8377 Tibetan:
8365 Tigrinya:
7775 Romanian:
7771 Russian:
7783 Samoan:
7776 Sanskrit:
7784 Scots Gaelic: 7168 Tonga:
7773 Serbian: 8382 Turkish:
7782 Serbo-Croatian: 8372 Turkmen:
6984 Italian:
7779 Shona:
7778 Sindhi:
7865 Singhalese:
7869 Slovak:
7879 Slovenian:
7982 Somali:
8378 Twi:
8368 Ukrainian:
8373 Urdu:
7079 Japanese:
7074 Javanese:
7073 Kannada:
7082 Kashmiri:
7089 Kazakh:
7176 Kirghiz:
7565 Korean:
6869 Kurdish:
6976 Laotian:
7576 Latin:
Basque:
Bengali; Bangla:
Finnish:
8375 Uzbek:
8376 Vietnamese:
8379 Volapük:
6983 Welsh:
8385 Wolof:
8387 Xhosa:
8386 Yiddish:
8476 Yoruba:
8471 Zulu:
6678 French:
6890 Frisian:
6672 Galician:
6682 Georgian:
6671 German:
7789 Greek:
Bhutani:
Bihari:
Breton:
7065 Sundanese:
8076 Swahili:
8084 Swedish:
8065 Tagalog:
8185 Tajik:
Bulgarian:
Burmese:
Byelorussian: 6669 Greenlandic:
Cambodian: 7577 Guarani:
7679 Portuguese:
7665 Punjabi:
7178 Latvian, Lettish: 7686 Quechua:
82
VQT2J51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before requesting service, make the following checks. If you are in doubt about some of the check points, or if the solutions
indicated in the chart do not solve the problem, consult your dealer for instructions.
The following does not indicate a problem with the unit:
≥ Regular disc/video cassette rotating sound.
≥ Poor reception due to atmospheric conditions.
≥ Image disturbance during search.
≥ Periodic interruptions to the reception due to digital satellite broadcasting breaks.
≥ Operations are slow to respond when “Power Save in Standby” is activated.
≥ Operations are not working due to a poor-quality disc. (Try again using a Panasonic disc.)
≥ The unit freezing due to the activation of one of its safety devices (> 82, To restore the unit if it freezes).
≥ When the unit is turned on or off, there may be an unexpected sound.
General Issues:
Power
General Issues:
Displays
No power.
The unit does not turn on pressing [Í].
The display is dim.
¾ Change “Unit’s Display” in the Setup menu. (> 69)
¾ Insert the AC mains lead securely into a known active
household mains socket. (> 11)
“0:00” is flashing on the unit’s display.
¾ Set the clock. (> 14)
¾ Linked timer recordings with external equipment is in
recording standby (“EXT-L” on the unit’s display blinks
when [Í] is pressed). Press [EXT LINK] to cancel the
recording standby. (> 31)
The time recorded on the disc and the available time
shown do not add up.
¾ Check the fuse in the plug.
The displayed time of this unit is different from the
actual recording time or MP3 recording time.
¾ Times shown may disagree with actual times.
¾ [-R] [-R]DL] [+R] [+R]DL] The remaining capacity does not
increase even if titles are deleted.
¾ Available space on a DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) or +RW
disc increases when you delete the last title (space may
increase slightly when you delete other titles).
The unit switches to standby mode.
The unit is turned off automatically.
¾ One of the unit’s safety devices is activated. Press [Í/I] on
the main unit to turn the unit on.
¾ If you connected this unit to an “HDAVI Control” compatible
TV with an HDMI cable, or connected this unit to a Q Link-
compatible TV with a fully wired 21-pin Scart cable, this unit
will be automatically set to standby mode when the TV is
set to standby mode. (> 46)
¾ If you record or edit about 200 times or more, the remaining
capacity of DVD-R, DVD-R DL, +R, and +R DL is reduced
and then recording or editing may be disabled (for the
second layer on DVD-R DL and +R DL, this happens after
about 60 times).
This unit turns off when the TV input is switched.
¾ This is a normal phenomenon when using VIERA Link
(HDAVI Control 4 or later). For details please read the
operating instructions for the TV.
¾ The time during searching may not be displayed accurately.
The clock is not correct.
¾
Under adverse reception conditions, etc., the automatic time
correction function may not work. In this case, “Automatic” is
automatically turned to “Off”. If re-setting the Auto Clock
Setting does not work, set the time manually. (
>
14)
Compared to the actual recorded time, the elapsed
time displayed is less.
(Only when recording in NTSC)
¾ The displayed recording/play time is converted from the
number of frames at 29.97 frames (equal to 0.999 seconds)
to one second. There will be a slight difference between the
time displayed and the actual elapsed time (e.g., actual
one-hour elapsed time may display as approximately 59
minutes 56 seconds). This does not affect the recording.
The tape counter is not changing.
¾ The tape counter does not change while playing
unrecorded parts. The “second” display changes as follows:
(e.g., Blank after 1 h 36 min)
¾ The unit’s display also appears like this if the tape is dirty or
damaged.
Consult your dealer if this is the case.
The clock does not display on the unit when
switched to standby.
¾ Ensure “Power Save in Standby” is deactivated. (> 72)
83
VQT2J51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting Guide
Cannot eject a disc.
¾ The unit is recording.
General Issues:
Operation
¾ The unit may have a problem. Eject the disc as in 2 left.
¾ Linked timer recordings with external equipment is in
recording standby (“EXT-L” on the unit’s display blinks
when [Í] is pressed.) Press [EXT LINK] to cancel the
recording standby.
Cannot operate the TV with unit’s remote control.
¾ Change the manufacturer code on the remote control.
(> 74)
¾ It may be necessary to set the code on the remote control
again after changing the batteries. (> 82)
If the Child Lock function is activated, above operation does
not work. Cancel the Child Lock function. (> 31, 74)
Cannot operate the DVD.
¾ Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive when
Startup is slow.
operating DVDs or CDs. (> 20)
¾ Startup takes time in the following situations:
– A disc other than a DVD-RAM is inserted.
– The clock is not set.
– Immediately after a power failure or the AC mains lead is
connected.
– When the unit is connected with an HDMI cable.
¾ Deactivate “Power Save in Standby” in the Setup menu.
(> 72)
Cannot operate the VHS.
¾ Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the VHS drive when
operating video cassettes. (> 20)
The remote control doesn’t work.
¾ The remote control code is wrong. Change to the correct
code. (> 82)
¾ The batteries are depleted. Replace them with new ones.
(> 6)
General Issues:
GUIDE Plus+
¾ Point the remote control at the remote control sensor on the
main unit. (> 6)
¾ Remove obstacles between the remote control and the
main unit.
¾ Remove dust from the transmission window and the unit’s
sensor.
¾ Coloured glass may obstruct the signal reception/
transmission.
The GUIDE Plus+ system does not receive any data.
¾ Check whether the clock is properly set. (> 14)
¾ If signal quality is bad (ghost images or limited reception),
the GUIDE Plus+ system may not be able to receive any
data.
¾ Perform “DVB Auto Setup by Signal Quality” in the Setup
menu. (> 67)
¾ Don’t place the signal sensor in direct sunlight or in areas
that may be subject to sun exposure.
¾ It may be necessary to set the manufacturer code again
after changing the batteries. (> 74)
¾ If the “X HOLD” is displayed on the unit’s front display, the
Child Lock function is activated. (> 74)
¾ If the “EXT-L” is displayed on the unit’s front display, Linked
timer recordings with external equipment is in recording
standby. (> 31)
“No Data” is displayed for some or all stations.
¾ Some stations are not supported by the GUIDE Plus+
system.
¾ Programme the timer recording manually. (> 33)
¾ Perform “DVB Auto Setup by Signal Quality” in the Setup
menu. (> 67)
The GUIDE Plus+ information is not displayed
properly.
¾ There was a programme change or GUIDE Plus+
information from a broadcast station was possibly not
correctly transmitted.
The unit is on but cannot be operated.
¾ Recording drive or playback drive has not been selected
properly. (> 20, 22)
¾ Some operations may be prohibited by the disc.
¾ The unit is warm (“U59” appears on the unit’s display). Wait
until “U59” disappears. (> 81)
Check the current programme, e.g. on the Web site for the
GUIDE Plus+ system provider or station provider.
¾ One of the unit’s safety devices may have been activated.
Reset the unit as follows:
The GUIDE Plus+ data is not updated.
Press [Í/I] on the main unit to switch to standby mode.
If the unit doesn’t switch to standby mode, reset the unit
(> 82, To restore the unit if it freezes).
¾ The unit must be in standby mode in order to update the
data. If the unit is in EXT LINK mode (“EXT-L” lights up in
the unit’s display), then the data update may also not work.
¾ Make sure that the time is set correctly. (> 14)
¾ Check whether “Off” is set under “TV Guide Download in
Standby” and change the setting in “System Update” in the
Setup menu. (> 73)
¾ The unit cannot be operated while performing an update.
“SW-DL” appears on the unit’s display while it is updating.
Please wait until the “SW-DL” disappears. (> 73)
“U88” is displayed and the disc cannot be ejected.
¾ The unit is carrying out the recovery process. The disc may
be defective. Do the following to eject the disc. Try another
disc.
1 Press [Í/I] on the main unit to switch to standby mode.
If the unit doesn’t switch to standby mode, reset the
unit (> 82, To restore the unit if it freezes).
2 While the unit is turned off, press and hold [∫] and
[CH W] on the main unit at the same time for about
5 seconds. (Ejection may take extra time depending on
discs.)
84
VQT2J51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
General Issues:
DVB-T
The digital channel information does not appear.
¾ Select the length of time (3–10 sec.) in the “On-Screen
Messages” in the Setup menu. (> 69)
¾ The digital channel information will not appear during
playback or recording.
¾ Perform “DVB Auto Setup by Signal Quality” in the Setup
menu. (> 67)
Digital broadcasts cannot be received.
¾ Check the connections. (> 10, 11, 75)
¾ Digital broadcast may not have started in your region yet.
¾ Perform “DVB Auto Setup by Signal Quality” in the Setup
menu. (> 67)
TV reception worsens after connecting the unit.
No Digital Teletext
¾ This can occur because the signals are being divided
between the unit and other equipment. It can be solved by
using a signal booster, available from electronics retailers.
¾
¾
Not all functions of Digital Teletext work on this unit.
When subtitle is on or additional information in the digital channel
information is displayed, Digital Teletext does not work.
¾ Perform “DVB Auto Setup by Signal Quality” in the Setup
menu. (> 67)
After “DVB Auto Setup by Signal Quality” or “DVB
Auto Setup by Region” only some or no DVB
channels are found.
After the Auto-Setup, there aren’t any stations in the
station list although found stations were displayed
during Auto-Setup.
¾ Check to ensure your area is covered by DVB
transmissions.
¾ Check that the aerial and antenna cable are designed for
¾
“Shipping Condition” was performed or the unit was in the delivery
status. The Auto-Setup was then started and interrupted.
Do an Auto-Setup again and let it continue right through to
the end.The data is only saved after this has been
completed.
DVB.
¾ Perform “DVB Auto Setup by Signal Quality” in the Setup
menu. (> 67)
Picture regularly breaks up on some channels, “No
Signal” message is displayed.
The Signal Strength is over 100% (> 10)
¾ Check “Signal Condition”. If “Signal Quality” or “Signal
Strength” are displayed in red or constantly changing,
check aerial. If problem persists consult your local TV aerial
installer. (> 67)
¾ Check that the aerial and antenna cable are designed for
DVB.
¾ Interference (known as impulse noise) from household
appliances such as light switches, fridges, etc. may cause
picture break up and/or audio distortion. Use a high quality
quad shielded coaxial cable fly lead between this unit and
antenna wall socket to minimise impulse noise pickup. If
problem persists consult your local TV aerial installer.
¾ Check aerial connection.
¾ Reduce the signal amplification at your aerial. (> 67)
After performing an update, you can no longer
receive broadcasts.
¾ Depending on the content of the software update, some
settings may have returned to the preset values.
Perform “Shipping Condition” in the Setup menu and then
set the channel. (> 67, 73)
General Issues:
VIERA Link
VIERA Link doesn’t work.
¾ Adjust the aerial reception with “DVB Manual Tuning”.
(> 67)
¾ Perform “DVB Auto Setup by Signal Quality” in the Setup
menu. (> 67)
¾ Check the HDMI cable connection. Check that “HDMI” is
displayed on the front display when the unit is powering on.
¾ Make sure that “VIERA Link” is set to “On”. (> 70)
¾ Check the “HDAVI Control” settings on the connected
device.
¾ Some functions may not work depending on the version of
“HDAVI Control” of the connected equipment. This unit
supports “HDAVI Control 5” function.
¾ If the connection for the equipment connected with an
HDMI cable was changed, or if there was a power failure or
the plug was removed from the household mains socket,
“HDAVI Control” may not work. In this case, perform the
following operations.
Picture very infrequently breaks up on some or all
channels.
¾ Electrical atmospheric interference caused by local or
distant lightning storms or heavy rain with wind in “leafy”
locations may cause pictures to break up and audio to mute
or distort momentarily.
¾ Impulse noise interference from an infrequently used
electrical appliance, or a passing vehicle or lawn mower
with a “noisy” ignition system.
¾ Perform “DVB Auto Setup by Signal Quality” in the Setup
menu. (> 67)
1 When the HDMI cable is connected to all equipment with
the power on, turn the TV (VIERA) on again.
2 Change the TV (VIERA) settings for the “HDAVI Control”
function to off, and then set to on again. (For more
information, see the VIERA operating instructions.)
3 Switch the VIERA input to HDMI connection with this
unit, and after this unit’s screen is displayed, check that
“HDAVI Control” is working.
Unusual station sorting.
¾ The station sorting of this unit is pre-defined. Use
Favourites to sort the stations as you want them. (> 66)
The Control Panel does not appear.
¾ The control panel is only displayed when connected to a TV
with “HDAVI Control 2” or later function. (> 47)
The operation on this unit (music playback etc.) is
interrupted.
¾ The operation on this unit may be interrupted when you
press buttons on the TV remote control that do not work for
VIERA Link functions.
85
VQT2J51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting Guide
General Issues:
USB
The 4:3 aspect ratio picture expands left and right.
Screen size is wrong.
¾ If you connect an HDMI cable, set “Aspect for 4:3 Video” in
the Setup menu to “16:9”. (> 70)
¾ Check the settings for “TV Aspect” in the Setup menu.
(> 70)
It may be possible to adjust the display mode on the TV. Refer
to your television’s operating instructions.
The contents of the USB memory cannot be read.
¾ Remove the USB memory from the USB port and then
insert again. If this does not solve the problem, turn off and
turn on the unit again.
¾ Check that the USB memory is inserted correctly. (> 7)
¾ The format of the USB memory or of its contents is not
compatible with the unit. (The contents on the USB memory
may be damaged.) (> 17, 18)
¾ The USB memory contains a folder structure and/or file
extensions that are not compatible with this unit. (> 18)
¾ Turn off and then turn on the unit again.
¾ USB memories connected using a USB extension cable or
a USB hub may not be recognized by this unit.
Titles recorded with 16:9 aspect are stretched
vertically.
¾ 16:9 aspect programmes are recorded in 4:3 aspect in the
following cases.
– [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] If you recorded or copied using “EP” or
“FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” recording mode.
– If you recorded or copied to a +R, +R DL or +RW.
It may be possible to adjust the display mode on the TV. Refer
to your television’s operating instructions.
¾ Some USB memories cannot be used with this unit. (> 17)
¾ If inserted during playback, recording or copying etc., the
USB memory may not be recognized by this unit.
Playback Issues:
Picture
There is a lot of after-image when playing video.
¾ Set “Playback NR” in the Picture menu to “Off”. (> 63)
The images from this unit do not appear on the TV.
Picture is distorted.
¾ Make sure the connections are pushed in firmly. (> 10, 11,
12, 75, 76, 77)
There is no apparent change in picture quality when
making adjustments in the Picture menu using the
on-screen display.
¾ Try connecting an alternative cable.
¾ Make sure recorder is connected to an appropriate AV input
of the TV. (> 10, 11, 12, 75, 76, 77)
¾ The effect cannot be seen with certain types of video.
¾ Make sure the TV’s input setting (e.g., AV1) is correct.
¾ The TV isn’t compatible with RGB signals.
Set “AV1 Output” in the Setup menu to “Video”. (> 71)
¾ The unit’s “TV System” setting differs from the TV system
used by the disc now playing. While stopped, keep
pressing [∫] and [< OPEN/CLOSE] on the main unit for
5 or more seconds.
Cannot see the beginning of the title played.
¾ (If connecting to a TV that supports VIERA Link with an
HDMI cable)
When [1] (PLAY) is pressed on this unit’s remote control,
but you may not be able to see the beginning of the title
played until the picture is displayed on the TV. Using [:],
return to the beginning of the title.
The system switches from PAL to NTSC or vice versa.
(> 70)
¾ When this unit is connected with an HDMI cable, use a disc
that matches with this unit’s TV system.
The picture is distorted during play, or video will not
play correctly.
¾ Picture may not be seen when more than 4 devices are
connected with HDMI cables.
Reduce the number of connected devices.
¾ You may be playing a TV programme recorded with poor
reception or unfavourable weather conditions.
¾ The picture may be distorted or a black screen may appear
briefly between recorded titles in the following situations:
– between titles recorded with different recording modes.
– between scenes recorded with different aspect ratios.
– between scenes recorded with different resolutions.
– between playlist chapters.
Television reception worsens or becomes
impossible after connecting the unit.
¾ This can occur because the signals are being divided
between the unit and other equipment. It can be solved by
using a signal booster, available from electronics retailers.
¾ Broadcast signals may not be output from this unit’s RF
OUT terminal. Select “On” in “RF OUT ( Aerial Signal )” in
the Setup menu. (> 72)
¾ Make sure the connections are pushed in firmly. (> 10, 11,
12, 75, 76, 77)
¾ Try connecting an alternative cable.
Picture does not appear during timer recording.
¾ Timer recordings work regardless of whether the unit is on
or off. To confirm the timer recording is going to work
properly, turn the unit on.
The screen changes automatically.
¾ When “Screen Saver” in the Setup menu is set to “On”, the
display may turn to the screen saver mode automatically if
there is no operation for 5 minutes or more. Press [OK] to
return to the previous screen.
Set “Screen Saver” in the Setup menu to “Off” to turn off the
screen saver function. (> 69)
86
VQT2J51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback Issues:
Sound
DVD-Video is not played.
¾ Ensure the DVD-Video region number for the disc is
correct, and the disc is not defective. (> Cover)
¾ You have set a ratings level to limit DVD-Video play.
Change this setting. (> 68)
No sound.
Low volume.
Distorted sound.
Cannot hear the desired audio type.
¾ Check the connections and the “Digital Audio Output”
settings. Check the input mode on the amplifier if you have
connected one. (> 10, 11, 12, 69, 70, 76)
¾ Check if TV is muted.
Alternative soundtrack and subtitles cannot be
selected.
¾ The languages are not recorded on the disc.
¾ You may not be able to use the on-screen menus to change
the soundtrack and subtitles on some discs. Use the disc’s
menus to make changes. (> 20)
¾ Check if amplifier is muted.
¾ Sound is not output while fast-forwarding during chasing
playback and simultaneous record and playback.
¾ The sound effects will not work when the bitstream signal is
output from the HDMI AV OUT terminal or the DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT terminal.
¾ Audio may not be heard when more than 4 devices are
connected with HDMI cables. Reduce the number of
connected devices.
No subtitles.
¾ Subtitles are not recorded on the disc.
¾ Turn the subtitles on. (> 62)
¾ To output audio from a device connected with an HDMI
cable, set “Digital Audio Output” to “HDMI and Optical” in
the Setup menu. (> 70)
Angle cannot be changed.
¾ This function depends on software availability. Angles can
only be changed during scenes where different angles are
recorded.
¾ Depending on the connected equipment, the sound may be
distorted if this unit is connected with an HDMI cable.
¾ Make sure the connections are pushed in firmly. (> 10, 11,
12, 75, 76, 77)
You have forgotten your ratings PIN.
¾ Try connecting an alternative cable.
¾ With the tray open, press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the
DVD drive, then press and hold [¥ REC] and [1] (PLAY)
on the main unit simultaneously for about 5 or more
seconds.
Cannot switch audio.
¾ You cannot switch the audio in the following cases.
– When a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video
format), +R, +R DL or +RW disc is in the disc tray while
DVD drive is selected.
Quick View (Play k1.3) does not work.
¾ This does not work when audio is other than Dolby Digital.
¾ This does not work while recording in XP or FR mode.
– When the recording mode is XP and “Audio Mode for XP
Recording” is set to “LPCM”. (> 69)
¾ When recording a digital broadcast with multiple audio
channels, this unit will record only the audio channel
selected in “DVB Multi Audio” in the on-screen display. The
audio channel cannot be switched during playback. (> 63)
¾ You have used a digital connection. Set “Dolby Digital” to
“PCM” or connect using audio cables (analogue
connection). (> 69, 76)
The resume play function does not work.
¾ Memorized positions are cancelled when
– press [∫] several times.
– open the disc tray.
– [CD] [VCD] [USB] turn off the unit.
– if a recording or timer recording was executed.
¾ There are discs whose audio cannot be changed due to
how the disc was created.
The Video CD picture does not display properly.
¾ When connecting to Multi-system TV, select “NTSC” in “TV
System” in the Setup menu. (> 70)
Playback Issues:
Operation
¾ When connecting to PAL TV, the lower part of the picture
cannot be displayed correctly during search.
Play fails to start even when [1] (PLAY) is pressed.
Play starts but then stops immediately.
¾ Insert the disc correctly with the label facing up. (> 7)
¾ The disc is dirty, scratched or marked. (> 7)
¾ You tried to play a blank disc or a disc that is unplayable on
the unit. (> 15, 16, 18)
¾ You tried to play a +RW that needs to be finalised on the
equipment used for recording.
Time Slip, Manual Skip, etc. does not work.
¾ These functions do not work with finalised discs.
¾ Time Slip does not work when the unit’s “TV System”
settings are different from the title recorded on the disc.
(> 70)
¾ When recording to DVD-RAM using EP ( 8 hours ) mode,
play may not be possible on DVD players that are
compatible with DVD-RAM. In this case use EP ( 6 hours )
mode. (> 68)
¾ Make sure that the TV is turned on. If the menu or
messages are displayed, follow the on-screen instructions.
Cannot see the beginning of the title played.
¾ (If connecting to a TV that supports VIERA Link with an
HDMI cable)
When [1] (PLAY) is pressed on this unit’s remote control,
you may not be able to see the beginning of the title played
until the picture is displayed on the TV. Using [:], return
to the beginning of the title.
Audio and video momentarily pause.
¾ This occurs between playlist chapters.
¾ This occurs as scenes change during Quick View (Play
k1.3).
¾ [-R]DL] [+R]DL] When playing a title recorded on both layers,
the unit automatically switches between layers and plays
the title in the same way as a normal programme. However,
video and audio may momentarily cut out when the unit is
switching layers.
87
VQT2J51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting Guide
Playback Issues:
Music
Recording/Timer
Recording Issues: Recording/Copying/
External input
ID3 tag of a MP3 file is not completely displayed.
¾ Only the track name ([USB]) can be displayed with this unit.
Cannot record.
Cannot copy.
¾ You haven’t inserted a disc or the disc you inserted cannot
be recorded on. Insert a disc the unit can record onto.
(> 15)
Playback Issues:
Still Pictures
Cannot display DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen.
¾ [RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] The disc is unformatted.
Format the disc. (> 64)
¾ The disc is protected with the “DVD Management” settings.
(> 64)
¾ This screen cannot be displayed during recording or copy
or while the unit is standing by for linked timer recording
with external equipment.
¾ The accidental erasure prevention tab has been removed.
Cover the hole with adhesive tape. (> 7)
¾ Some programmes have limitations on the number of times
they can be recorded (CPRM). (> 27, 92)
Still pictures (JPEG) do not playback normally.
¾ The images that were edited on the PC, such as
Progressive JPEG etc., may not playback. (> 18)
¾ The disc is full or nearly full. Delete unneeded titles ( [RAM]
[-RW‹V›] [+RW]) or use another disc. (> 26, 50, 64)
¾ You cannot record and copy on finalised DVD-R, DVD-R
DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL discs.
However, you can record and copy again if you format
DVD-RW.
¾ If you repeatedly insert discs or turn the unit on and off
about 50 times or more, the recording or editing of DVD-R,
DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL, and
+RW discs may be disabled.
Playback Issues:
VHS Picture
On-screen display indicators do not appear.
¾ Select a setting other than “Off” in “On-Screen Messages”
in the Setup menu. (> 41, 69)
– Press [STATUS ] to show the on-screen display
indicators.
¾ DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R
DL and +RW discs recorded on this unit may not be
recordable on other Panasonic DVD Recorders.
¾ This unit cannot record NTSC signals to discs that already
have PAL signal recordings.
Play of discs recorded with both PAL and NTSC on another
unit is not guaranteed. (> 70)
¾ Some broadcasts are copyright protected. (> 15, 27, 92)
The grey background appears during playback.
¾ You are playing a blank or poor quality portion of the tape.
¾ You can damage the unit if you play dirty or damaged tapes
and this can cause the grey background to appear.
Playback Issues:
VHS Sound
Timer recording does not work properly.
Cannot hear the desired audio type.
¾ The timer programme is incorrect or different timer
programme times overlap. Correct the programme. (> 34)
¾ The programme is not in timer recording standby. (“F” in
the timer recording list is not on.) (> 34)
¾ Press and hold [STTL
] for about 5 or more seconds to
select the audio. (> 41)
1 Press [PROG/CHECK].
2 Press [3, 4] to select the programme and press the
There is noise when playing a video tape.
¾ Adjust the tracking. (> 41)
¾ The tape is old or damaged.
“Red” button.
¾ The clock is not correct. Set the clock. (> 14)
¾ The programme information in the GUIDE Plus+ system
may not be correct. It is recommended to modify the start
and end times to allow a margin of a few minutes. (> 23)
Playback Issues:
VHS Play
The playback screen flickers.
Timer recording does not stop even when [∫] is
¾ The video head is dirty. (> 6)
¾ The tape is old or damaged.
¾ Check the “SQPB” setting. (> 71)
pressed.
¾ When using the linked timer recording with external
equipment, press [EXT LINK]. (“EXT-L” on the unit’s display
disappears.) (> 31)
¾ If you start recording immediately after turning on the unit
while “Power Save in Standby” is not activated in the Setup
menu (Quick Start mode), you cannot then stop recording
for a few seconds.
¾ Make sure that the recording drive is selected. Press
[DRIVE SELECT] to select the recording drive. (> 22)
The timer programme remains even after recording
finishes.
¾ The timer programme remains if set to daily or weekly timer
recording. (> 33, 34)
88
VQT2J51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording Issues: VHS Recording
Part or all of a recorded title has been lost.
¾ If the power shuts down or the AC mains lead is
disconnected from the household mains socket while
recording or editing, the title may be lost or the disc may
become unusable. We cannot offer any guarantee
regarding lost titles or discs. You will have to format the disc
([RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+RW]) or use a new disc. (> 64)
“1 ” flashes when I try to start recording.
Cannot record.
¾ A video cassette is not inserted. Insert a video cassette
with an accidental erasure prevention tab. (> 7)
¾ The accidental erasure prevention tab has been removed.
Cover the hole with adhesive tape. (> 7)
Cannot copy VHS to DVD.
¾ The disc is protected with the “DVD Management” settings.
(> 64)
¾ Some video tapes on the market (including rental videos)
are copy-protected to prevent illegal reproductions.
Copy-protected video tapes cannot be properly recorded.
¾ You cannot copy using the One Touch Copying operation
button while the FUNCTION MENU, the Timer Recording
List screen, etc. are displayed.
Cannot copy DVD to VHS.
¾ A video cassette without the accidental erasure prevention
tab is inserted. Use a video cassette with an accidental
erasure prevention tab.
¾ Some DVDs on the market (including rental DVD) are
copy-protected to prevent illegal reproductions.
Copy-protected DVDs cannot be properly recorded.
¾ You cannot copy using the One Touch Copying operation
button while the FUNCTION MENU, the Timer Recording
List screen, etc. are displayed.
The sound level after editing is not equal on DVD
and on VHS.
¾ The sound level on DVD and VHS may not match
depending on the disc.
When the sound level in a particular part of the sound
source is soft or loud, the sound may be recorded loudly or
softly on a video tape.
Stripe-shaped black noise is recorded.
¾ An external playback device is interfering with the TV
because the device is too close to the TV. Move the device
away from the TV.
The programme name and the recorded title do not
match.
¾ There was a programme change after timer recording was
set but the recorded title still has the old programme name.
An unusually loud sound is coming from the
rotating DVD-R, etc.
¾ When recording to a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-
Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW the sound of the disc
rotating may be louder than normal, however, this is not a
problem.
Cannot record video or sound from the external
device.
¾ The external device is not correctly connected. (> 11, 12,
32, 75, 76)
¾ The proper external input channel (AV2 or AV3) is not
selected. Press [INPUT SELECT] to change.
89
VQT2J51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting Guide
Editing Issues:
DVD
Cannot format.
¾ The disc is dirty. Wipe with a damp cloth and then wipe dry.
(> 7)
¾ Disc may be defective or of poor quality.
¾ You tried formatting a disc that is not compatible with the
unit. (> 15, 16, 64)
Cannot create chapters.
Cannot mark the start point or the end point during
“Partial Delete” operation.
¾ The unit writes the chapter division information to the disc
when you turn it off or remove the disc.
The information is not written if there is an interruption in
the power.
¾ These operations are not possible with still pictures.
¾ You cannot set points if they are too close to each other.
You cannot set an end point before a start point.
Cannot delete chapters.
¾ [RAM] When the chapter is too short to delete, use
“Combine Chapters” to make the chapter longer. (> 52)
The available recording time doesn’t increase even
after deleting titles on the disc.
¾ Available space on DVD-R, DVD-R DL, +R, or +R DL does
not increase even after deleting previous titles.
¾ Available space on DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) or +RW
increases when you delete the last title.
Cannot create a playlist.
¾ You cannot select all the chapters at once in a title if the title
also includes still pictures. Select them individually.
Editing Issues:
Still Pictures
Copying, deleting, and setting protection takes a
long time.
¾ When there are a lot of folders and files, it may sometimes
take a few hours.
¾ When repeating copying or deleting, it may sometimes take
a long time. Format the disc. (> 64)
90
VQT2J51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
VHS
Power supply:
AC 220 V to 240 V, 50 Hz
Approx. 34 W
Recording format:
Heads:
VHS Video Cassette System
Standard with FM audio
4 Helical Scan Heads for Video
2 Helical Scan Heads for FM audio
1 Fixed Head for Normal audio
Power consumption:
Standby mode: (“Power Save in Standby” is
activated and “RF OUT
Approx. 0.5 W
( Aerial Signal )” is set to “Off”)
Tape Speed/Recording Time (with E-240 tape):
PAL:
(“Power Save in Standby” is
not activated)
Approx. 14 W
SP: 23.39 mm/s, 240 min
LP: 11.7 mm/s, 480 min
EP: 7.8 mm/s, 720 min
SP: 33.35 mm/s, 168 min
EP: 11.12 mm/s, 505 min
Recordable discs:
NTSC:
DVD-RAM: 2X SPEED (Ver. 2.0), 2–3X SPEED (Ver. 2.1)
2–5X SPEED (Ver. 2.2)
DVD-R (SL): 1X SPEED (Ver. 2.0), 1–4X SPEED (Ver. 2.0)
1–8X SPEED (Ver. 2.0), 1–16X SPEED (Ver. 2.1)
DVD-R (DL): 2–4X SPEED (Ver. 3.0), 2–8X SPEED (Ver. 3.0)
Audio
Recording system:
Dolby Digital 2 ch,
Linear PCM (XP mode)
AV1/AV2 (21 pin), AV3 (pin jack)
Standard: 0.5 Vrms,
Full scale: 2.0 Vrms at 1 kHz
More than 10 k≠
AV1/AV2 (21 pin), Audio Out (pin jack)
Standard: 0.5 Vrms,
Full scale: 2.0 Vrms at 1 kHz
Less than 1 k≠
Audio In:
Input Level:
DVD-RW:
1X SPEED (Ver. 1.1), 1–2X SPEED (Ver. 1.1)
2–4X SPEED (Ver. 1.2), 2–6X SPEED (Ver. 1.2)
2.4X SPEED (Ver. 1.0), 2.4–4X SPEED (Ver. 1.1)
2.4–8X SPEED (Ver. 1.2)
2.4–16X SPEED (Ver. 1.3)
2.4X SPEED (Ver. 1.0), 2.4–8X SPEED (Ver. 1.1)
2.4X SPEED (Ver. 1.1), 2.4–4X SPEED (Ver. 1.2)
+R (SL):
Input Impedance:
Audio Out:
Output Level:
+R (DL):
+RW:
Recording system:
DVD-RAM:
Output Impedance:
Digital Audio Out:
Optical terminal (PCM, Dolby
Digital, DTS, MPEG)
DVD Video Recording format
DVD-Video format
DVD-Video format
DVD-Video format
DVD-R:
DVD-R DL (Dual Layer):
DVD-RW:
+R
+R DL (Double Layer)
USB
USB port:
USB standard:
Format:
Type A: 1 pc
USB 2.0 High Speed
FAT16, FAT32
+RW
Recording time:
HDMI Output:
19 pin type A: 1pc
HDMITM (V.1.3a with Deep Colour)
This unit supports “HDAVI Control 5” function.
Max. 8 hours (using 4.7 GB disc)
XP: Approx. 1 hour
LP: Approx. 4 hours
Playable discs:
SP: Approx. 2 hours
EP: Approx. 6 hours or 8 hours
Others
Regional Code:
Operating temperature range:
Operating humidity range:
Dimensions (WkHkD):
# 2
5 oC to 40 oC
10 % to 80 % RH (no condensation)
430 mma84 mma335 mm
(excluding the projecting parts)
430 mma84 mma346 mm
(including the projecting parts)
Approx. 5.4kg
DVD-RAM:
DVD-R:
DVD-R DL (Dual Layer):
DVD-RW:
DVD Video Recording format, JPEG
DVD-Video format, MP3§1, JPEG§1
DVD-Video format, MP3§1, JPEG§1
DVD Video Recording format,
DVD-Video format
Mass:
+R
§1
+R DL (Double Layer)
+RW
Finalising is necessary for compatible playback.
Conforming to IEC62107
§2
DVD-Video, CD-Audio (CD-DA), Video CD, SVCD§2
This unit is not compatible with “Chaoji Video CD” available on the market
including CVD, DVCD and SVCD that do not conform to IEC62107.
CD-DA§1, Video CD§1, SVCD§1, §2
MP3§1, JPEG§1
,
CD-R/CD-RW:
Optical pick-up:
Notes
System with 1 lens, 2 integration units
(662 nm wavelength for DVDs, 780 nm wavelength for CDs)
≥Specifications are subject to change without notice.
LASER Specification
Class 1 LASER Product
Wave Length:
780 nm (CDs)
662 nm (DVDs)
Laser Power:
No hazardous radiation is emitted
with the safety protection
Television system
Tuner System:
Channel Coverage:
UHF:
DVB-T
UK
21 to 68 ch
Not provided
RF converter output:
Video
Video system:
PAL colour signal, 625 lines, 50 fields
NTSC colour signal, 525 lines, 60 fields
MPEG2 (Hybrid VBR)
Recording system:
Video In (PAL/NTSC):
AV1/AV2 (21 pin), AV3 (pin jack)
1 Vp-p 75 ≠, termination
AV2 (21 pin), AV3 (S terminal)
1 Vp-p 75 ≠, termination
AV2 (21pin) 0.7 Vp-p (PAL) 75 ≠,
termination
S-Video In (PAL/NTSC):
RGB In (PAL):
Video Out (PAL/NTSC):
RGB Out (PAL/NTSC):
AV1/AV2 (21 pin), Video Out (pin
jack) 1 Vp-p 75 ≠, termination
AV1 (21 pin), 0.7 Vp-p (PAL) 75 ≠,
termination
91
VQT2J51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Glossary
Bitstream
Folder
This is a signal compressed and converted into digital form. It is
converted back to a multi-channel audio signal, e.g., 5.1-channel, by a
decoder.
This is a place on the disc where groups of data are stored together. In
the case of this unit, it refers to the place where still pictures (JPEG) are
stored.
CPRM (Content Protection for Recordable Media)
CPRM is technology used to protect broadcasts that are allowed to be
recorded only once. Such broadcasts can be recorded only with CPRM-
compatible recorders and discs.
Formatting
Formatting is the process of making media such as DVD-RAM
recordable on recording equipment.
You can format DVD-RAM, DVD-RW (only as DVD-Video format) and
+RW or unused +R and +R DL on this unit.
Formatting irrevocably erases all contents.
Decoder
A decoder restores the coded audio signals on DVDs to normal. This is
called decoding.
Frame and Field
Frame refers to the single images that constitute the video you see on
your TV. Each frame consists of 2 fields.
Deep Colour
This unit incorporates HDMI (V.1.3a with Deep Colour) technology that
can reproduce greater colour gradation (4096 steps) when connected to
a compatible TV.
You can enjoy exceptionally rich, natural-looking colours, with smooth,
detailed gradation and minimal colour banding.
[A lower colour gradation (256 steps), without Deep Colour, will be
reproduced if connected to a TV which does not support Deep Colour.
The unit will automatically set appropriate output to suit the connected
TV.]
Frame
Field
Field
≥A frame still shows 2 fields, so there may be some blurring between
them, but picture quality is generally better.
≥A field still shows less picture information so it may be rougher, but
there is no blurring.
Dolby Digital
This is a method of coding digital signals developed by Dolby
Laboratories. Apart from stereo (2 channel) audio, these signals can
also be multi-channel audio. A large amount of audio information can be
recorded on one disc using this method.
HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface)
Unlike conventional connections, it transmits uncompressed digital
video and audio signals on a single cable. This unit supports high-
definition video output [720p (750p), 1080i (1125i) and 1080p (1125p)]
from HDMI AV OUT terminal. To enjoy high-definition video a high
definition compatible television is required.
When recording on this unit Dolby Digital (2 channel) is the default
audio.
Down-mixing
This is the process of remixing the multi-channel audio found on some
discs into two channels. It is useful when you want to listen to the 5.1-
channel audio recorded on DVDs through your TV’s speakers. Some
discs prohibit down-mixing. If this is the case, this unit can only output
the front two channels.
JPEG (Joint Photographic Experts Group)
This is a system used for compressing/decoding color still pictures. If
you select JPEG as the storage system on digital cameras, etc., the
data will be compressed to 1/10–1/100 of its original size. The benefit of
JPEG is less deterioration in picture quality considering the degree of
compression.
Drive
In the instance of this unit, this refers to the disc (DVD) and video
cassette (VHS). These perform the reading and writing of data.
LPCM (Linear PCM)
These are uncompressed digital signals, similar to those found on CDs.
DTS (Digital Theater Systems)
This surround system is used in many movie theaters. There is good
separation between the channels, so realistic sound effects are
possible.
MPEG2 (Moving Picture Experts Group)
A standard for efficiently compressing and expanding colour video.
MPEG2 is a compression standard used for DVD and satellite based
digital broadcasting. This unit records programmes using MPEG2.
Dynamic range
Dynamic range is the difference between the lowest level of sound that
can be heard above the noise of the equipment and the highest level of
sound before distortion occurs. Dynamic range compression means
reducing the gap between the loudest and softest sounds. This means
you can hear dialogue clearly at low volume.
MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer 3)
An audio compression method that compresses audio to approximately
1/10 of its size without any significant loss of audio quality.
Pan & Scan/Letterbox
In general, DVD-Video are produced with the intention that they will be
viewed on a widescreen TV (16:9 aspect ratio), so images often don’t fit
regular TVs (4:3 aspect ratio). 2 styles of picture, “Pan & Scan” and
“Letterbox”, deal with this problem.
Film and Video
DVD-Video are recorded using either film or video. The unit can
determine which type has been used, then uses the most suitable
method of progressive output.
Pan & Scan: The sides are cut off so the picture
fills the screen.
Film:
Recorded at 25 frames per second (PAL discs) or 24
frames per second (NTSC discs). (NTSC discs
recorded at 30 frames per second as well.)
Generally appropriate for motion picture films.
Letterbox:
Black bands appear at the top and
bottom of the picture so the
picture itself appears in an aspect
ratio of 16:9.
Video:
Recorded at 25 frames/50 fields per second (PAL
discs) or 30 frames/60 fields per second (NTSC
discs). Generally appropriate for TV drama
programmes or animation.
Playback control (PBC)
If a Video CD has playback control, you can select scenes and
information with menus on the screen.
Finalise
A process that makes play of a recorded CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-R, etc.
possible on equipment that can play such media. You can finalise DVD-
R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, and +R DL on the
unit. After finalising, the disc becomes play-only and you can no longer
record or edit. However, finalised DVD-RW can be formatted to become
recordable.
(This unit is compatible with version 2.0 and 1.1.)
92
VQT2J51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Protection
You can prevent accidental erasure by setting writing protection or
erasure protection.
RGB
This refers to the three primary colours of light, red (R), green (G), and
blue (B) and also the method of producing video that uses them. By
dividing the video signal into the three colours for transmission, noise is
reduced for even higher quality images.
Sampling frequency
Sampling is the process of converting the heights of sound wave
(analogue signal) samples taken at set periods into digits (digital
encoding). Sampling frequency is the number of samples taken per
second, so larger numbers mean more faithful reproduction of the
original sound.
Signal Quality
This is the guide for checking the aerial direction. The numbered values
displayed do not indicate the strength of the signal, but the quality of the
signal (the signal to noise ratio, or “S/N”). The channels you can receive
are affected by weather conditions, seasons, time (day/night), region,
length of the cable that is connected to the aerial, etc.
Thumbnail
This refers to a miniature representation of a picture used to display
multiple pictures in the form of a matrix.
1080i
In one high-definition image, 1080 (1125) alternating scan lines pass
every 1/50th of a second to create an interlace image. Because 1080i
(1125i) more than doubles current television broadcasts of 480i (525i),
the detail is much clearer and creates a more realistic and rich image.
1080p
In one high-definition image, 1080 (1125) scan lines pass at the same
time every 1/50th of a second to create a progressive image. Since
progressive video does not alternate scan lines like interlace, there is a
minimal amount of screen flicker.
720p
In one high-definition image, 720 (750) scan lines pass at the same
time every 1/50th of a second to create a progressive image. Since
progressive video does not alternate scan lines like interlace, there is a
minimal amount of screen flicker.
GUIDE Plus+, SHOWVIEW are (1) registered trademarks or
trademarks of, (2) manufactured under license from and (3) subject of
various international patents and patent applications owned by, or
licensed to, Gemstar-TV Guide International, Inc. and/or its related
affiliates.
GEMSTAR-TV GUIDE INTERNATIONAL, INC. AND/OR ITS
RELATED AFFILIATES ARE NOT IN ANY WAY LIABLE FOR THE
ACCURACY OF THE PROGRAM SCHEDULE INFORMATION
PROVIDED BY THE GUIDE PLUS+ SYSTEM. IN NO EVENT SHALL
GEMSTAR-TV GUIDE INTERNATIONAL, INC. AND/OR ITS
RELATED AFFILIATES BE LIABLE FOR ANY AMOUNTS
REPRESENTING LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF BUSINESS, OR
INDIRECT, SPECIAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN
CONNECTION WITH THE PROVISION OR USE OF ANY
INFORMATION, EQUIPMENT, OR SERVICES RELATING TO THE
GUIDE PLUS+ SYSTEM.
The recording and playback of content on this or any other device
may require permission from the owner of the copyright or other such
rights in that content. Panasonic has no authority to and does not
grant you that permission and explicitly disclaims any right, ability or
intention to obtain such permission on your behalf. It is your
responsibility to ensure that your use of this or any other device
complies with applicable copyright legislation in your country. Please
refer to that legislation for more information on the relevant laws and
regulations involved or contact the owner of the rights in the content
you wish to record or playback.
93
VQT2J51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CAUTION!
THIS PRODUCT UTILIZES A LASER.
USE OF CONTROLS OR ADJUSTMENTS OR PERFORMANCE
OF PROCEDURES OTHER THAN THOSE SPECIFIED HEREIN
MAY RESULT IN HAZARDOUS RADIATION EXPOSURE.
DO NOT OPEN COVERS AND DO NOT REPAIR YOURSELF.
REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED PERSONNEL.
CAUTION!
(Back of product)
≥DO NOT INSTALL OR PLACE THIS UNIT IN A BOOKCASE,
BUILT-IN CABINET OR IN ANOTHER CONFINED SPACE.
ENSURE THE UNIT IS WELL VENTILATED. TO PREVENT
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK OR FIRE HAZARD DUE TO
OVERHEATING, ENSURE THAT CURTAINS AND ANY OTHER
MATERIALS DO NOT OBSTRUCT THE VENTILATION VENTS.
≥DO NOT OBSTRUCT THE UNIT’S VENTILATION OPENINGS
WITH NEWSPAPERS, TABLECLOTHS, CURTAINS, AND
SIMILAR ITEMS.
≥DO NOT PLACE SOURCES OF NAKED FLAMES, SUCH AS
LIGHTED CANDLES, ON THE UNIT.
≥DISPOSE OF BATTERIES IN AN ENVIRONMENTALLY
FRIENDLY MANNER.
(Inside of product)
≥For your safety, be sure not to connect or handle the equipment with
wet hands.
WARNING:
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE, ELECTRIC SHOCK OR
PRODUCT DAMAGE,
≥DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPARATUS TO RAIN, MOISTURE,
DRIPPING OR SPLASHING AND THAT NO OBJECTS FILLED
WITH LIQUIDS, SUCH AS VASES, SHALL BE PLACED ON
THE APPARATUS.
≥USE ONLY THE RECOMMENDED ACCESSORIES.
≥DO NOT REMOVE THE COVER (OR BACK); THERE ARE NO
USER SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO
QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
CAUTION
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace
only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the
manufacturer. Dispose of used batteries according to the
manufacturer’s instructions.
THIS UNIT IS INTENDED FOR USE IN MODERATE CLIMATES.
This product may receive radio interference caused by mobile
telephones during use. If such interference is apparent, please
increase separation between the product and the mobile
telephone.
The socket outlet shall be installed near the equipment and easily
accessible.
The mains plug of the power supply cord shall remain readily
operable.
To completely disconnect this apparatus from the AC Mains,
disconnect the power supply cord plug from AC receptacle.
94
VQT2J51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Information for Users on Collection and
Disposal of Old Equipment and used Batteries
These symbols on the products, packaging,
and/or accompanying documents mean that
used electrical and electronic products and
batteries should not be mixed with general
household waste.
For proper treatment, recovery and recycling
of old products and used batteries, please
take them to applicable collection points, in
accordance with your national legislation and
the Directives 2002/96/EC and 2006/66/EC.
By disposing of these products and batteries
correctly, you will help to save valuable
resources and prevent any potential negative
effects on human health and the environment
which could otherwise arise from inappropriate
waste handling.
For more information about collection and
recycling of old products and batteries, please
contact your local municipality, your waste
disposal service or the point of sale where you
purchased the items.
Penalties may be applicable for incorrect
disposal of this waste, in accordance with
national legislation.
For business users in the European
Union
If you wish to discard electrical and electronic
equipment, please contact your dealer or
supplier for further information.
[Information on Disposal in other
Countries outside the European Union]
These symbols are only valid in the European
Union. If you wish to discard these items, please
contact your local authorities or dealer and ask
for the correct method of disposal.
Note for the battery symbol (bottom two
symbol examples):
This symbol might be used in combination with
a chemical symbol. In this case it complies with
the requirement set by the Directive for the
chemical involved.
Cd
95
VQT2J51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
A Adjust the audio quality
F Finalise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65, 92 T Time Slip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64, 92 Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66–67
(Sound menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Adjust the picture quality
FR (Flexible recording mode) . . . 28, 30 U USB
(Picture menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Album (Still picture)
FREEVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Copy (Still Picture) . . . . . . . . . . . . 60–61
FUNCTION MENU Display . . . . . . 45, 69
Insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Supported formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 G GUIDE Plus+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23, 36–37
Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 H HDAVI Control . . . . . . . 12, 46–47, 70, 77
Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Aspect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Audio
V VHS
HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12, 70, 77, 92
I Initialize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
J JPEG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18, 43–44, 92
L Language
Code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Disc menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Soundtrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62, 68
Subtitle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62, 68
Linked timer recordings with external
equipment (SKY Digital STB/digital
satellite receiver) — EXT LINK . . 31, 71
LPCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69, 92
M Manual Skip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Menu
Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24–25, 57–59
Insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Jet Rewind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21, 40–41
S-VHS Quasi Playback (SQPB) . . 40, 71
VHS Index Search System (VISS) . . . 40
VHS settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
VIERA Link . . . . . . . . . . 12, 46–47, 70, 77
Digital broadcast
(DVB Multi Audio) . . . . . . . . . . . . 63, 67
Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Audio Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33, 48
Auto Standby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
AV2 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
C Change Thumbnail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Channel
Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66–67
Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39, 52
Chapter Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52, 68
Chasing playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Child Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Cleaning
JPEG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Mode
Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Lens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Main unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Video heads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Still Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Clock Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 N Name
Connection
Aerial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10, 11, 75
Amplifier, system component,
receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Digital satellite receiver . . . . . . . . . 11, 12
HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12, 77
Television . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–12, 75–77 O Owner ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Video cassette recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Copy
Album (Still picture) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Entering text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33, 50
New Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49, 69
P Partial Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Power Save in Standby . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Properties
Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Title/Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57–59
Copy (playlist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
CPRM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Create Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39, 52
Create playlists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44, 56
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Protection
D Delete
Album (Still picture) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Q Q Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Quick View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
R Ratings level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Aspect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Direct TV Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
External Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31, 32
Flexible Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23, 33–35
Remaining tape time . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Remote control code . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Repeat Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40, 63
Resume play function . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
S Screen Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Select channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Signal Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Simultaneous rec and play . . . . . . . . 30
Slideshow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43–44
Soundtrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62, 68
Still picture
Album (Still Picture) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
All titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52, 54
Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26, 50
Digital Audio Output settings . . . . 69, 70
Digital broadcast
Digital channel information . . . . . . . . . 48
DVB Multi Audio . . . . . . . . . . . 48, 63, 67
DVB Subtitle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48, 67
New Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49, 69
Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Select the channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Signal Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
System Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
DIRECT NAVIGATOR . . . . . 38, 43, 50, 55
Direct TV Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15–16
Display
Digital channel information . . . . . . . . . 48
Status messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Divide Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
DVB Multi Audio
Recording with selected audio . . . . 22, 33
Select audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63, 67
DVB Subtitle
Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Subtitle
Record with subtitle . . . . . . . . . . . . 22, 33
Select subtitle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Show subtitle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
E Edit
Digital broadcast
Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Enabling discs to be played on other
equipment — Finalise . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
(DVB Subtitle) . . . . . . . . 22, 33, 48, 67
Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62, 68
Subtitles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Switch the audio/subtitles on the disc
(Disc menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
System Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
EU
Environment friendly printed on chlorine free bleached paper.
Panasonic Corporation
p
VQT2J51
Pursuant to at the directive 2004/108/EC, article 9(2)
Panasonic Testing Centre
F1209KA0
Panasonic Marketing Europe GmbH
Winsbergring 15, 22525 Hamburg, Germany
© Panasonic Corporation 2009
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|